diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html 2006-01-29 10:15:40.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:37.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ findsmb

Name

findsmb — list info about machines that respond to SMB - name queries on a subnet

Synopsis

findsmb [subnet broadcast address]

DESCRIPTION

This perl script is part of the samba(7) + name queries on a subnet

Synopsis

findsmb [subnet broadcast address]

DESCRIPTION

This perl script is part of the samba(7) suite.

findsmb is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests. It uses nmblookup(1) and smbclient(1) to obtain this information. -

OPTIONS

-r

Controls whether findsmb takes +

OPTIONS

-r

Controls whether findsmb takes bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name registered of the remote machine. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only. @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ findsmb(1) is run. This value is passed to nmblookup(1) - as part of the -B option.

EXAMPLES

The output of findsmb lists the following + as part of the -B option.

EXAMPLES

The output of findsmb lists the following information for all machines that respond to the initial nmblookup for any name: IP address, NetBIOS name, Workgroup name, operating system, and SMB server version.

There will be a '+' in front of the workgroup name for @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ 192.168.35.88 SCNT2 +[MVENGR] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] 192.168.35.93 FROGSTAR-PC [MVENGR] [Windows 5.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager] 192.168.35.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] -

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

SEE ALSO

nmbd(8), +

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

SEE ALSO

nmbd(8), smbclient(1), and nmblookup(1) -

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities +

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html 2006-01-29 10:15:43.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html 2006-07-06 05:17:38.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ libsmbclient

Name

libsmbclient — An extension library for browsers and that can be used as a generic browsing API.

Synopsis

Browser URL:

smb://[[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]] [?options] -

DESCRIPTION

+

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

libsmbclient is a library toolset that permits applications to manipulate CIFS/SMB network @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ libsmbclient can not be used directly from the command line, instead it provides an extension of the capabilities of tools such as file managers and browsers. This man page describes the configuration options for this tool so that the user may obtain greatest utility of use. -

OPTIONS

+

OPTIONS

What the URLs mean:

smb://

Shows all workgroups or domains that are visible in the network. The behavior matches @@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ libsmbclient will check the users shell environment for the USER parameter and will use its value when if the user parameter was not included in the URL. -

PROGRAMMERS GUIDE

+

PROGRAMMERS GUIDE

Watch this space for future updates. -

VERSION

+

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite. -

AUTHOR

+

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html 2006-01-29 10:15:45.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html 2006-07-06 05:17:39.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -lmhosts

Name

lmhosts — The Samba NetBIOS hosts file

Synopsis

lmhosts is the samba(7) NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.

DESCRIPTION

This file is part of the samba(7) suite.

lmhosts is the Samba +lmhosts

Name

lmhosts — The Samba NetBIOS hosts file

Synopsis

lmhosts is the samba(7) NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.

DESCRIPTION

This file is part of the samba(7) suite.

lmhosts is the Samba NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file. It is very similar to the /etc/hosts file format, except that the hostname component must correspond - to the NetBIOS naming format.

FILE FORMAT

It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. + to the NetBIOS naming format.

FILE FORMAT

It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. The two fields on each line are separated from each other by white space. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored. Each line in the lmhosts file contains the following information:

  • IP Address - in dotted decimal format.

  • NetBIOS Name - This name format is a @@ -25,10 +25,10 @@ the NetBIOS name requested.

    The second mapping will be returned only when the "0x20" name type for a name "NTSERVER" is queried. Any other name type will not be resolved.

    The default location of the lmhosts file - is in the same directory as the smb.conf(5) file.

FILES

lmhosts is loaded from the configuration directory. This is + is in the same directory as the smb.conf(5) file.

FILES

lmhosts is loaded from the configuration directory. This is usually /etc/samba or /usr/local/samba/lib. -

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities +

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html 2006-01-29 10:15:49.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:40.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -log2pcap

Name

log2pcap — Extract network traces from Samba log files

Synopsis

log2pcap [-h] [-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

log2pcap reads in a +log2pcap

Name

log2pcap — Extract network traces from Samba log files

Synopsis

log2pcap [-h] [-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

log2pcap reads in a samba log file and generates a pcap file (readable by most sniffers, such as ethereal or tcpdump) based on the packet dumps in the log file.

The log file must have a log level of at least 5 to get the SMB header/parameters right, 10 to get the first 512 data bytes of the packet and 50 to get the whole packet. -

OPTIONS

-h

If this parameter is +

OPTIONS

-h

If this parameter is specified the output file will be a hex dump, in a format that is readable by the text2pcap utility.

-q

Be quiet. No warning messages about missing @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ If this argument is not specified, output data will be written to stdout.

-h|--help

Print a summary of command line options. -

EXAMPLES

Extract all network traffic from all samba log files:

+

EXAMPLES

Extract all network traffic from all samba log files:

 			$ log2pcap < /var/log/* > trace.pcap
 	

Convert to pcap using text2pcap:

 	$ log2pcap -h samba.log | text2pcap -T 139,139 - trace.pcap
-	

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

BUGS

Only SMB data is extracted from the samba logs, no LDAP, +

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

BUGS

Only SMB data is extracted from the samba logs, no LDAP, NetBIOS lookup or other data.

The generated TCP and IP headers don't contain a valid - checksum.

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities + checksum.

AUTHOR

The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

This manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html 2006-01-29 10:15:51.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html 2006-07-06 05:17:41.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -mount.cifs

Name

mount.cifs — mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS)

Synopsis

mount.cifs {service} {mount-point} [-o options]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

mount.cifs mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It +mount.cifs

Name

mount.cifs — mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS)

Synopsis

mount.cifs {service} {mount-point} [-o options]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

mount.cifs mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It is usually invoked indirectly by the mount(8) command when using the "-t cifs" option. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@

mount.cifs causes the cifs vfs to launch a thread named cifsd. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted resource is unmounted (usually via the umount utility). -

OPTIONS

user=arg

specifies the username to connect as. If +

OPTIONS

user=arg

specifies the username to connect as. If this is not given, then the environment variable USER is used. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "workgroup/user" or "workgroup/user%password" to allow the password and workgroup @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ the server lacks support for returning inode numbers or equivalent.

noserverino

client generates inode numbers (rather than using the actual one from the server) by default. -

nouser_xattr

(default) Do not allow getfattr/setfattr to get/set xattrs, even if server would support it otherwise.

rsize=arg

default network read size

wsize=arg

default network write size

--verbose

Print additional debugging information for the mount. Note that this parameter must be specified before the -o. For example:

mount -t cifs //server/share /mnt --verbose -o user=username

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

+

nouser_xattr

(default) Do not allow getfattr/setfattr to get/set xattrs, even if server would support it otherwise.

rsize=arg

default network read size

wsize=arg

default network write size

--verbose

Print additional debugging information for the mount. Note that this parameter must be specified before the -o. For example:

mount -t cifs //server/share /mnt --verbose -o user=username

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

The variable USER may contain the username of the person to be used to authenticate to the server. The variable can be used to set both username and @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ The variable PASSWD_FILE may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is read and used as the password. -

NOTES

This command may be used only by root, unless installed setuid, in which case the noeexec and nosuid mount flags are enabled.

CONFIGURATION

+

NOTES

This command may be used only by root, unless installed setuid, in which case the noeexec and nosuid mount flags are enabled.

CONFIGURATION

The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem. In the directory /proc/fs/cifs are various @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ cifs.ko which will list the options that may be passed to cifs during module installation (device driver load). For more information see the kernel file fs/cifs/README. -

BUGS

Mounting using the CIFS URL specification is currently not supported. +

BUGS

Mounting using the CIFS URL specification is currently not supported.

The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space.

Note that the typical response to a bug report is a suggestion @@ -194,11 +194,11 @@ and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: mount.cifs (try mount.cifs -V), kernel (see /proc/version) and server type you are trying to contact. -

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 1.39 of - the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.15).

SEE ALSO

+

VERSION

This man page is correct for version 1.39 of + the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.15).

SEE ALSO

Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt and fs/cifs/README in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information. -

umount.cifs(8)

AUTHOR

Steve French

The syntax and manpage were loosely based on that of smbmount. It +

umount.cifs(8)

AUTHOR

Steve French

The syntax and manpage were loosely based on that of smbmount. It was converted to Docbook/XML by Jelmer Vernooij.

The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace tool mount.cifs is Steve French. The Linux CIFS Mailing list diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html 2006-01-29 10:15:54.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html 2006-07-06 05:17:42.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ net

Name

net — Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers. -

Synopsis

net {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-d debuglevel] [-V]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility +

Synopsis

net {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-d debuglevel] [-V]

DESCRIPTION

This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility available for windows and DOS. The first argument should be used to specify the protocol to use when executing a certain command. ADS is used for ActiveDirectory, RAP is using for old (Win9x/NT3) clients and RPC can be used for NT4 and Windows 2000. If this argument is omitted, net will try to determine it automatically. Not all commands are available on all protocols. -

OPTIONS

-h|--help

Print a summary of command line options. +

OPTIONS

-h|--help

Print a summary of command line options.

-w target-workgroup

Sets target workgroup or domain. You have to specify either this option or the IP address or the name of a server. @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Defaults to trying 445 first, then 139.

-n <primary NetBIOS name>

This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. +to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in smb.conf.

-s <configuration file>

The file specified contains the @@ -53,19 +53,19 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter -in the smb.conf file.

COMMANDS

CHANGESECRETPW

This command allows the Samba machine account password to be set from an external application +override the parameter +in the smb.conf file.

COMMANDS

CHANGESECRETPW

This command allows the Samba machine account password to be set from an external application to a machine account password that has already been stored in Active Directory. DO NOT USE this command unless you know exactly what you are doing. The use of this command requires that the force flag (-f) be used also. There will be NO command prompt. Whatever information is piped into stdin, either by typing at the command line or otherwise, will be stored as the literal machine password. Do NOT use this without care and attention as it will overwrite a legitimate machine password without warning. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED. -

TIME

The NET TIME command allows you to view the time on a remote server - or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.

TIME

Without any options, the NET TIME command +

TIME

The NET TIME command allows you to view the time on a remote server + or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.

TIME

Without any options, the NET TIME command displays the time on the remote server. -

TIME SYSTEM

Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for /bin/date

TIME SET

Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on -the remote server using /bin/date.

TIME ZONE

Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.

[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options]

+

TIME SYSTEM

Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for /bin/date

TIME SET

Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on +the remote server using /bin/date.

TIME ZONE

Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.

[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options]

Join a domain. If the account already exists on the server, and [TYPE] is MEMBER, the machine will attempt to join automatically. (Assuming that the machine has been created in server manager) @@ -73,71 +73,71 @@ be created.

[TYPE] may be PDC, BDC or MEMBER to specify the type of server joining the domain. -

[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]

Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain +

[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]

Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain using the old style of domain joining - you need to create a trust -account in server manager first.

[RPC|ADS] USER

[RPC|ADS] USER

List all users

[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE target

Delete specified user

[RPC|ADS] USER INFO target

List the domain groups of a the specified user.

[RPC|ADS] USER RENAME oldname newname

Rename specified user.

[RPC|ADS] USER ADD name [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]

Add specified user.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP

[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]

List user groups.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE name [misc. options]

Delete specified group.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD name [-C comment]

Create specified group.

[RAP|RPC] SHARE

[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]

Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.

[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD name=serverpath [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]

Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers +account in server manager first.

[RPC|ADS] USER

[RPC|ADS] USER

List all users

[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE target

Delete specified user

[RPC|ADS] USER INFO target

List the domain groups of a the specified user.

[RPC|ADS] USER RENAME oldname newname

Rename specified user.

[RPC|ADS] USER ADD name [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]

Add specified user.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP

[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]

List user groups.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE name [misc. options]

Delete specified group.

[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD name [-C comment]

Create specified group.

[RAP|RPC] SHARE

[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]

Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.

[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD name=serverpath [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]

Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers specifies the number of users that can be connected to the -share simultaneously.

SHARE DELETE sharenam

Delete specified share.

[RPC|RAP] FILE

[RPC|RAP] FILE

List all open files on remote server.

[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE fileid

Close file with specified fileid on -remote server.

[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO fileid

+share simultaneously.

SHARE DELETE sharenam

Delete specified share.

[RPC|RAP] FILE

[RPC|RAP] FILE

List all open files on remote server.

[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE fileid

Close file with specified fileid on +remote server.

[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO fileid

Print information on specified fileid. Currently listed are: file-id, username, locks, path, permissions. -

[RAP|RPC] FILE USER

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

SESSION

RAP SESSION

Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS -sessions on the target server.

RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE CLIENT_NAME

Close the specified sessions.

RAP SESSION INFO CLIENT_NAME

Give a list with all the open files in specified session.

RAP SERVER DOMAIN

List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults -to local domain.

RAP DOMAIN

Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the -current network.

RAP PRINTQ

RAP PRINTQ LIST QUEUE_NAME

Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. +

[RAP|RPC] FILE USER

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

SESSION

RAP SESSION

Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS +sessions on the target server.

RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE CLIENT_NAME

Close the specified sessions.

RAP SESSION INFO CLIENT_NAME

Give a list with all the open files in specified session.

RAP SERVER DOMAIN

List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults +to local domain.

RAP DOMAIN

Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the +current network.

RAP PRINTQ

RAP PRINTQ LIST QUEUE_NAME

Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. If the QUEUE_NAME is omitted, all -queues are listed.

RAP PRINTQ DELETE JOBID

Delete job with specified id.

RAP VALIDATE user [password]

+queues are listed.

RAP PRINTQ DELETE JOBID

Delete job with specified id.

RAP VALIDATE user [password]

Validate whether the specified user can log in to the remote server. If the password is not specified on the commandline, it will be prompted. -

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP GROUPMEMBER

RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST GROUP

List all members of the specified group.

RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE GROUP USER

Delete member from group.

RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD GROUP USER

Add member to group.

RAP ADMIN command

Execute the specified command on +

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP GROUPMEMBER

RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST GROUP

List all members of the specified group.

RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE GROUP USER

Delete member from group.

RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD GROUP USER

Add member to group.

RAP ADMIN command

Execute the specified command on the remote server. Only works with OS/2 servers. -

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP SERVICE

RAP SERVICE START NAME [arguments...]

Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP SERVICE STOP

Stop the specified service on the remote server.

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP PASSWORD USER OLDPASS NEWPASS

+

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP SERVICE

RAP SERVICE START NAME [arguments...]

Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP SERVICE STOP

Stop the specified service on the remote server.

Note

Currently NOT implemented.

RAP PASSWORD USER OLDPASS NEWPASS

Change password of USER from OLDPASS to NEWPASS. -

LOOKUP

LOOKUP HOST HOSTNAME [TYPE]

+

LOOKUP

LOOKUP HOST HOSTNAME [TYPE]

Lookup the IP address of the given host with the specified type (netbios suffix). The type defaults to 0x20 (workstation). -

LOOKUP LDAP [DOMAIN

Give IP address of LDAP server of specified DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

LOOKUP KDC [REALM]

Give IP address of KDC for the specified REALM. -Defaults to local realm.

LOOKUP DC [DOMAIN]

Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified -DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

LOOKUP MASTER DOMAIN

Give IP of master browser for specified DOMAIN -or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.

CACHE

Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It +

LOOKUP LDAP [DOMAIN

Give IP address of LDAP server of specified DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

LOOKUP KDC [REALM]

Give IP address of KDC for the specified REALM. +Defaults to local realm.

LOOKUP DC [DOMAIN]

Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified +DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

LOOKUP MASTER DOMAIN

Give IP of master browser for specified DOMAIN +or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.

CACHE

Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'.

All the timeout parameters support the suffixes:

s - Seconds
m - Minutes
h - Hours
d - Days
w - Weeks

-

CACHE ADD key data time-out

Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.

CACHE DEL key

Delete key from the cache.

CACHE SET key data time-out

Update data of existing cache entry.

CACHE SEARCH PATTERN

Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.

CACHE LIST

+

CACHE ADD key data time-out

Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.

CACHE DEL key

Delete key from the cache.

CACHE SET key data time-out

Update data of existing cache entry.

CACHE SEARCH PATTERN

Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.

CACHE LIST

List all current items in the cache. -

CACHE FLUSH

Remove all the current items from the cache.

GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]

Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is -omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in.

SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z

Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID.

GROUPMAP

Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. +

CACHE FLUSH

Remove all the current items from the cache.

GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]

Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is +omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in.

SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z

Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID.

GROUPMAP

Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. Parameters take the for "parameter=value". Common options include:

  • unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group

  • ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be resolvable to a SID

  • rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer

  • sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-..."

  • type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', - or 'builtin'

  • comment - Freeform text description of the group

GROUPMAP ADD

+ or 'builtin'

  • comment - Freeform text description of the group

  • GROUPMAP ADD

    Add a new group mapping entry:

     net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string \
           [type={domain|local}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string]
     

    -

    GROUPMAP DELETE

    Delete a group mapping entry. If more then one group name matches, the first entry found is deleted.

    net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID}

    GROUPMAP MODIFY

    Update en existing group entry

    +

    GROUPMAP DELETE

    Delete a group mapping entry. If more then one group name matches, the first entry found is deleted.

    net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID}

    GROUPMAP MODIFY

    Update en existing group entry

     net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] \
            [comment=string] [type={domain|local}]
     

    -

    GROUPMAP LIST

    List existing group mapping entries

    net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID]

    MAXRID

    Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local +

    GROUPMAP LIST

    List existing group mapping entries

    net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID]

    MAXRID

    Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local server (by the active 'passdb backend'). -

    RPC INFO

    Print information about the domain of the remote server, +

    RPC INFO

    Print information about the domain of the remote server, such as domain name, domain sid and number of users and groups. -

    [RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN

    Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.

    [RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW

    Force change of domain trust password.

    RPC TRUSTDOM

    RPC TRUSTDOM ADD DOMAIN

    Add a interdomain trust account for +

    [RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN

    Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.

    [RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW

    Force change of domain trust password.

    RPC TRUSTDOM

    RPC TRUSTDOM ADD DOMAIN

    Add a interdomain trust account for DOMAIN to the remote server. -

    RPC TRUSTDOM DEL DOMAIM

    Remove interdomain trust account for +

    RPC TRUSTDOM DEL DOMAIM

    Remove interdomain trust account for DOMAIN from the remote server. -

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH DOMAIN

    +

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH DOMAIN

    Establish a trust relationship to a trusting domain. Interdomain account must already be created on the remote PDC. -

    RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE DOMAIN

    Abandon relationship to trusted domain

    RPC TRUSTDOM LIST

    List all current interdomain trust relationships.

    RPC RIGHTS

    This subcommand is used to view and manage Samba's rights assignments (also +

    RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE DOMAIN

    Abandon relationship to trusted domain

    RPC TRUSTDOM LIST

    List all current interdomain trust relationships.

    RPC RIGHTS

    This subcommand is used to view and manage Samba's rights assignments (also referred to as privileges). There are three options current available: list, grant, and revoke. More details on Samba's privilege model and its use -can be found in the Samba-HOWTO-Collection.

    RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN

    Abort the shutdown of a remote server.

    SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]

    Shut down the remote server.

    -r

    +can be found in the Samba-HOWTO-Collection.

    RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN

    Abort the shutdown of a remote server.

    SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]

    Shut down the remote server.

    -r

    Reboot after shutdown.

    -f

    Force shutting down all applications. @@ -145,22 +145,119 @@ Timeout before system will be shut down. An interactive user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown.

    -C message

    Display the specified message on the screen to -announce the shutdown.

    SAMDUMP

    Print out sam database of remote server. You need -to run this on either a BDC.

    VAMPIRE

    Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to +announce the shutdown.

    RPC SAMDUMP

    Print out sam database of remote server. You need +to run this on either a BDC or a PDC.

    RPC VAMPIRE

    Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to local server. Can only be run an a BDC. -

    GETSID

    Fetch domain SID and store it in the local secrets.tdb.

    ADS LEAVE

    Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of.

    ADS STATUS

    Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. +

    RPC GETSID

    Fetch domain SID and store it in the local secrets.tdb.

    ADS LEAVE

    Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of.

    ADS STATUS

    Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. Prints out quite some debug info. Aimed at developers, regular -users should use NET ADS TESTJOIN.

    ADS PRINTER

    ADS PRINTER INFO [PRINTER] [SERVER]

    +users should use NET ADS TESTJOIN.

    ADS PRINTER

    ADS PRINTER INFO [PRINTER] [SERVER]

    Lookup info for PRINTER on SERVER. The printer name defaults to "*", the -server name defaults to the local host.

    ADS PRINTER PUBLISH PRINTER

    Publish specified printer using ADS.

    ADS PRINTER REMOVE PRINTER

    Remove specified printer from ADS directory.

    ADS SEARCH EXPRESSION ATTRIBUTES...

    Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The +server name defaults to the local host.

    ADS PRINTER PUBLISH PRINTER

    Publish specified printer using ADS.

    ADS PRINTER REMOVE PRINTER

    Remove specified printer from ADS directory.

    ADS SEARCH EXPRESSION ATTRIBUTES...

    Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results.

    Example: net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName -

    ADS DN DN (attributes)

    +

    ADS DN DN (attributes)

    Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the result. -

    Example: net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName

    WORKGROUP

    Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.

    HELP [COMMAND]

    Gives usage information for the specified command.

    VERSION

    This man page is complete for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    Example: net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName

    ADS WORKGROUP

    Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.

    USERSHARE

    Starting with version 3.0.23, a Samba server now supports the ability for +non-root users to add user define shares to be exported using the "net usershare" +commands. +

    +To set this up, first set up your smb.conf by adding to the [global] section : + +usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares + +Next create the directory /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares, change the owner to root and +set the group owner to the UNIX group who should have the ability to create usershares, +for example a group called "serverops". + +Set the permissions on /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares to 01770. + +(Owner and group all access, no access for others, plus the sticky bit, +which means that a file in that directory can be renamed or deleted only +by the owner of the file). + +Finally, tell smbd how many usershares you will allow by adding to the [global] +section of smb.conf a line such as : + +usershare max shares = 100. + +To allow 100 usershare definitions. Now, members of the UNIX group "serverops" +can create user defined shares on demand using the commands below. +

    The usershare commands are: + +

    net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]] - to add or change a user defined share.
    net usershare delete sharename - to delete a user defined share.
    net usershare info [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to print info about a user defined share.
    net usershare list [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to list user defined shares.

    + +

    USERSHARE ADD sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]

    +Add or replace a new user defined share, with name "sharename". +

    +"path" specifies the absolute pathname on the system to be exported. +Restrictions may be put on this, see the global smb.conf parameters : +"usershare owner only", "usershare prefix allow list", and +"usershare prefix deny list". +

    +The optional "comment" parameter is the comment that will appear +on the share when browsed to by a client. +

    The optional "acl" field +specifies which users have read and write access to the entire share. +Note that guest connections are not allowed unless the smb.conf parameter +"usershare allow guests" has been set. The definition of a user +defined share acl is : "user:permission", where user is a valid +username on the system and permission can be "F", "R", or "D". +"F" stands for "full permissions", ie. read and write permissions. +"D" stands for "deny" for a user, ie. prevent this user from accessing +this share. +"R" stands for "read only", ie. only allow read access to this +share (no creation of new files or directories or writing to files). +

    +The default if no "acl" is given is "Everyone:R", which means any +authenticated user has read-only access. +

    +The optional "guest_ok" has the same effect as the parameter of the +same name in smb.conf, in that it allows guest access to this user +defined share. This parameter is only allowed if the global parameter +"usershare allow guests" has been set to true in the smb.conf. +

    + +There is no separate command to modify an existing user defined share, +just use the "net usershare add [sharename]" command using the same +sharename as the one you wish to modify and specify the new options +you wish. The Samba smbd daemon notices user defined share modifications +at connect time so will see the change immediately, there is no need +to restart smbd on adding, deleting or changing a user defined share. +

    USERSHARE DELETE sharename

    +Deletes the user defined share by name. The Samba smbd daemon +immediately notices this change, although it will not disconnect +any users currently connected to the deleted share. +

    USERSHARE INFO [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename]

    +Get info on user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. +

    +net usershare info on its own dumps out info on the user defined shares that were +created by the current user, or restricts them to share names that match the given +wildcard pattern ('*' matches one or more characters, '?' matches only one character). +If the '-l' or '--long' option is also given, it prints out info on user defined +shares created by other users. +

    +The information given about a share looks like : + +[foobar] +path=/home/jeremy +comment=testme +usershare_acl=Everyone:F +guest_ok=n + +And is a list of the current settings of the user defined share that can be +modified by the "net usershare add" command. +

    USERSHARE LIST [-l|--long] wildcard sharename

    +List all the user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. +

    +net usershare list on its own list out the names of the user defined shares that were +created by the current user, or restricts the list to share names that match the given +wildcard pattern ('*' matches one or more characters, '?' matches only one character). +If the '-l' or '--long' option is also given, it includes the names of user defined +shares created by other users. +

    HELP [COMMAND]

    Gives usage information for the specified command.

    VERSION

    This man page is complete for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html 2006-01-29 10:15:57.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html 2006-07-06 05:17:43.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ nmbd

    Name

    nmbd — NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS - over IP naming services to clients

    Synopsis

    nmbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    nmbd is a server that understands + over IP naming services to clients

    Synopsis

    nmbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    nmbd is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients. It also @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, - but this can be overridden by the netbios name + but this can be overridden by the netbios name in smb.conf. Thus nmbd will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s). Additional names for nmbd to respond on can be set @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ replying to queries from clients for these names.

    In addition, nmbd can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS - server.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes + server.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes nmbd to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. By default, nmbd @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@

    -H <filename>

    NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name - resolution mechanism name resolve order described in smb.conf(5) to resolve any + resolution mechanism name resolve order described in smb.conf(5) to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note that the contents of this file are NOT used by nmbd to answer any name queries. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that nmbd responds to name queries on. Don't use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you - won't need help!

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the + won't need help!

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the inetd meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. @@ -104,18 +104,18 @@ configuration file. Other common places that systems install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf and /etc/samba/smb.conf.

    When run as a WINS server (see the - wins support + wins support parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page), nmbd will store the WINS database in the file wins.dat in the var/locks directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself.

    If nmbd is acting as a - browse master (see the local master + browse master (see the local master parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page, nmbd will store the browsing database in the file browse.dat in the var/locks directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself. -

    SIGNALS

    To shut down an nmbd process it is recommended +

    SIGNALS

    To shut down an nmbd process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9) NOT be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state. The correct way to terminate nmbd is to send it @@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ using smbcontrol(1) (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running - at a normally low log level.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    + at a normally low log level.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    inetd(8), smbd(8), smb.conf(5), smbclient(1), testparm(1), testprns(1), and the Internet RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page - http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html 2006-01-29 10:15:59.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:44.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ nmblookup

    Name

    nmblookup — NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS - names

    Synopsis

    nmblookup [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    nmblookup is used to query NetBIOS names + names

    Synopsis

    nmblookup [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    nmblookup is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine. All queries - are done over UDP.

    OPTIONS

    -M

    Searches for a master browser by looking + are done over UDP.

    OPTIONS

    -M

    Searches for a master browser by looking up the NetBIOS name name with a type of 0x1d. If name is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@

    -A

    Interpret name as an IP Address and do a node status query on this address.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. +to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in smb.conf.

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast - area.

    EXAMPLES

    nmblookup can be used to query + area.

    EXAMPLES

    nmblookup can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way nslookup is used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, nmblookup must be called like this:

    nmblookup -U server -R 'name'

    For example, running :

    nmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'

    would query the WINS server samba.org for the domain - master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:02.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:46.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ -ntlm_auth

    Name

    ntlm_auth — tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function

    Synopsis

    ntlm_auth [-d debuglevel] [-l logdir] [-s <smb config file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    ntlm_auth is a helper utility that authenticates +ntlm_auth

    Name

    ntlm_auth — tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function

    Synopsis

    ntlm_auth [-d debuglevel] [-l logdir] [-s <smb config file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    ntlm_auth is a helper utility that authenticates users using NT/LM authentication. It returns 0 if the users is authenticated successfully and 1 if access was denied. ntlm_auth uses winbind to access the user and authentication data for a domain. This utility is only indended to be used by other programs (currently Squid and mod_ntlm_winbind) -

    OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

    +

    OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

    The winbindd(8) daemon must be operational for many of these commands to function.

    Some of these commands also require access to the directory winbindd_privileged in $LOCKDIR. This should be done either by running this command as root or providing group access to the winbindd_privileged directory. For - security reasons, this directory should not be world-accessable.

    OPTIONS

    --helper-protocol=PROTO

    + security reasons, this directory should not be world-accessable.

    OPTIONS

    --helper-protocol=PROTO

    Operate as a stdio-based helper. Valid helper protocols are:

    squid-2.4-basic

    Server-side helper for use with Squid 2.4's basic (plaintext) @@ -64,33 +64,33 @@ any data (such as usernames/passwords) that may contain malicous user data, such as a newline. They may also need to decode strings from the helper, which likewise may have been base64 encoded.

    Username

    The username, expected to be in - Samba's unix charset. -

    Example 1. 

    Username: bob

    Example 2. 

    Username:: Ym9i
    Username

    The user's domain, expected to be in - Samba's unix charset. -

    Example 3. 

    Domain: WORKGROUP

    Example 4. 

    Domain:: V09SS0dST1VQ
    Full-Username

    The fully qualified username, expected to be in - Samba's and qualified with the - winbind separator. -

    Example 5. 

    Full-Username: WORKGROUP\bob

    Example 6. 

    Full-Username:: V09SS0dST1VQYm9i
    LANMAN-Challenge

    The 8 byte LANMAN Challenge value, + Samba's unix charset. +

    Example 1. 

    Username: bob

    Example 2. 

    Username:: Ym9i
    Username

    The user's domain, expected to be in + Samba's unix charset. +

    Example 3. 

    Domain: WORKGROUP

    Example 4. 

    Domain:: V09SS0dST1VQ
    Full-Username

    The fully qualified username, expected to be in + Samba's and qualified with the + winbind separator. +

    Example 5. 

    Full-Username: WORKGROUP\bob

    Example 6. 

    Full-Username:: V09SS0dST1VQYm9i
    LANMAN-Challenge

    The 8 byte LANMAN Challenge value, generated randomly by the server, or (in cases such as MSCHAPv2) generated in some way by both the server and the client. -

    Example 7. 

    LANMAN-Challege: 0102030405060708
    LANMAN-Response

    The 24 byte LANMAN Response value, +

    Example 7. 

    LANMAN-Challege: 0102030405060708
    LANMAN-Response

    The 24 byte LANMAN Response value, calculated from the user's password and the supplied LANMAN Challenge. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate. -

    Example 8. 

    LANMAN-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    NT-Response

    The >= 24 byte NT Response +

    Example 8. 

    LANMAN-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    NT-Response

    The >= 24 byte NT Response calculated from the user's password and the supplied LANMAN Challenge. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate. -

    Example 9. 

    NT-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    Password

    The user's password. This would be +

    Example 9. 

    NT-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    Password

    The user's password. This would be provided by a network client, if the helper is being used in a legacy situation that exposes plaintext passwords in this way. -

    Example 10. 

    Password: samba2

    Example 11. 

    Password:: c2FtYmEy
    Request-User-Session-Key

    Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return +

    Example 10. 

    Password: samba2

    Example 11. 

    Password:: c2FtYmEy
    Request-User-Session-Key

    Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return the user session key associated with the login. -

    Example 12. 

    Request-User-Session-Key: Yes
    Request-LanMan-Session-Key

    Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return +

    Example 12. 

    Request-User-Session-Key: Yes
    Request-LanMan-Session-Key

    Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return the LANMAN session key associated with the login. -

    Example 13. 

    Request-LanMan-Session-Key: Yes
    --username=USERNAME

    +

    Example 13. 

    Request-LanMan-Session-Key: Yes
    --username=USERNAME

    Specify username of user to authenticate

    --domain=DOMAIN

    Specify domain of user to authenticate @@ -123,12 +123,12 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    EXAMPLE SETUP

    To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2.5, with both basic and +

    EXAMPLE SETUP

    To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2.5, with both basic and NTLMSSP authentication, the following should be placed in the squid.conf file.

    @@ -144,13 +144,13 @@
     

     auth_param ntlm program ntlm_auth --helper-protocol=squid-2.5-ntlmssp --require-membership-of='WORKGROUP\Domain Users'
     auth_param basic program ntlm_auth --helper-protocol=squid-2.5-basic --require-membership-of='WORKGROUP\Domain Users'
    -

    TROUBLESHOOTING

    If you're experiencing problems with authenticating Internet Explorer running +

    TROUBLESHOOTING

    If you're experiencing problems with authenticating Internet Explorer running under MS Windows 9X or Millenium Edition against ntlm_auth's NTLMSSP authentication helper (--helper-protocol=squid-2.5-ntlmssp), then please read the Microsoft Knowledge Base article #239869 and follow instructions described there. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The ntlm_auth manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij and diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.7.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.7.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.7.html 2006-01-29 10:16:05.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.7.html 2006-07-06 05:17:47.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,12 +1,19 @@ -pam_winbind

    Name

    pam_winbind — PAM module for Winbind

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    +pam_winbind

    Name

    pam_winbind — PAM module for Winbind

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    pam_winbind is a PAM module that can authenticate users against the local domain by talking to the Winbind daemon. -

    OPTIONS

    - pam_winbind supports several options: +

    OPTIONS

    + + pam_winbind supports several options which can either be set in + the PAM configuration files or in the pam_winbind configuration + file situated at + /etc/security/pam_winbind.conf. Options + from the PAM configuration file take precedence to those from + the configuration file. +

    debug

    Gives debugging output to syslog.

    require_membership_of=[SID or NAME]

    If this option is set, pam_winbind will only succeed if the user is a member of the given SID or NAME. A SID can be either a group-SID, a alias-SID or even a user-SID. It is also possible to give a NAME instead of the - SID. That name must have the form: MYDOMAIN\mygroup or - MYDOMAIN\myuser. pam_winbind will, in that case, lookup the SID internally. Note that + SID. That name must have the form: MYDOMAIN\\mygroup or + MYDOMAIN\\myuser. pam_winbind will, in that case, lookup the SID internally. Note that NAME may not contain any spaces. It is thus recommended to only use SIDs. You can verify the list of SIDs a user is a member of with wbinfo --user-sids=SID.

    try_first_pass

    use_first_pass

    @@ -16,10 +23,37 @@

    use_authtok

    Set the new password to the one provided by the previously stacked password module. If this option is not set pam_winbind will ask the user for the new password. +

    krb5_auth

    + + pam_winbind can authenticate using Kerberos when winbindd is + talking to an Active Directory domain controller. Kerberos + authentication must be enabled with this parameter. When + Kerberos authentication can not succeed (e.g. due to clock + skew), winbindd will fallback to samlogon authentication over + MSRPC. When this parameter is used in conjunction with + winbind refresh tickets, winbind will + keep your Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) uptodate by refreshing + it whenever necessary. + +

    krb5_ccache_type=[type]

    + + When pam_winbind is configured to try kerberos authentication + by enabling the krb5_auth option, it can + store the retrieved Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) in a + credential cache. The type of credential cache can be set with + this option. Currently the only supported value is: + FILE. In that case a credential cache in + the form of /tmp/krb5cc_UID will be created, where UID is + replaced with the numeric user id. Leave empty to just do + kerberos authentication without having a ticket cache after the + logon has succeeded. + +

    cached_login

    + Winbind allows to logon using cached credentials when winbind offline logon is enabled. To use this feature from the PAM module this option must be set.

    -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of Samba.

    AUTHOR

    +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of Samba.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    This manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij and Guenther Deschner.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:08.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html 2006-07-06 05:17:48.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -pdbedit

    Name

    pdbedit — manage the SAM database (Database of Samba Users)

    Synopsis

    pdbedit [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value] [-c account-control]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts +pdbedit

    Name

    pdbedit — manage the SAM database (Database of Samba Users)

    Synopsis

    pdbedit [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-t, --password-from-stdin] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value] [-c account-control] [-y]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts stored in the sam database and can only be run by root.

    The pdbedit tool uses the passdb modular interface and is independent from the kind of users database used (currently there are smbpasswd, ldap, nis+ and tdb based and more can be added without changing the tool).

    There are five main ways to use pdbedit: adding a user account, removing a user account, modifing a user account, listing user - accounts, importing users accounts.

    OPTIONS

    -L

    This option lists all the user accounts + accounts, importing users accounts.

    OPTIONS

    -L

    This option lists all the user accounts present in the users database. This option prints a list of user/uid pairs separated by the ':' character.

    Example: pdbedit -L

    @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
     		directory network path.

    Example: -h "\\\\BERSERKER\\sorce"

    -D drive

    This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account. It will specify the windows drive - letter to be used to map the home directory.

    Example: -d "H:" + letter to be used to map the home directory.

    Example: -D "H:"

    -S script

    This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account. It will specify the user's logon script path.

    Example: -S "\\\\BERSERKER\\netlogon\\sorce.bat" @@ -78,12 +78,15 @@ retype new password

    Note

    pdbedit does not call the unix password syncronisation - script if unix password sync + script if unix password sync has been set. It only updates the data in the Samba user database.

    If you wish to add a user and synchronise the password that immediately, use smbpasswd's -a option. -

    -r

    This option is used to modify an existing user +

    -t, --password-from-stdin

    This option causes pdbedit to read the password + from standard input, rather than from /dev/tty (like the + passwd(1) program does). The password has + to be submitted twice and terminated by a newline each.

    -r

    This option is used to modify an existing user in the database. This command needs a user name specified with the -u switch. Other options can be specified to modify the properties of the specified user. This flag is kept for backwards compatibility, but @@ -113,7 +116,10 @@

    Example: pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -C 3

     account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0
     account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3
    -
    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. +

    -y

    If you specify -y, + then -i in-backend -e out-backend + applies to the account policies instead of the user database.

    This option will allow to migrate account policies from their default + tdb-store into a passdb backend, e.g. an LDAP directory server.

    Example: pdbedit -y -i tdbsam: -e ldapsam:ldap://my.ldap.host

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options.

    -V

    Prints the program version number.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The @@ -134,12 +140,12 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -

    NOTES

    This command may be used only by root.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    NOTES

    This command may be used only by root.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The pdbedit manpage was written by Simo Sorce and Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:11.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:49.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ profiles

    Name

    profiles — A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files -

    Synopsis

    profiles [-v] [-c SID] [-n SID] {file}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    profiles is a utility that +

    Synopsis

    profiles [-v] [-c SID] [-n SID] {file}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    profiles is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in windows registry files. It currently only supports NT. -

    OPTIONS

    file

    Registry file to view or edit.

    -v,--verbose

    Increases verbosity of messages. +

    OPTIONS

    file

    Registry file to view or edit.

    -v,--verbose

    Increases verbosity of messages.

    -c SID1 -n SID2

    Change all occurences of SID1 in file by SID2.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The profiles man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:13.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:50.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ rpcclient

    Name

    rpcclient — tool for executing client side - MS-RPC functions

    Synopsis

    rpcclient [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logdir] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    rpcclient is a utility initially developed + MS-RPC functions

    Synopsis

    rpcclient [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logdir] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    rpcclient is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone several stages of development and stability. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from - their UNIX workstation.

    OPTIONS

    server

    NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. + their UNIX workstation.

    OPTIONS

    server

    NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is - resolved using the name resolve order line from smb.conf(5).

    -c|--command='command string'

    execute semicolon separated commands (listed + resolved using the name resolve order line from smb.conf(5).

    -c|--command='command string'

    execute semicolon separated commands (listed below))

    -I IP-address

    IP address is the address of the server to connect to. It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation.

    Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ rpcclient to prompt for a password and type it in directly.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. +to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in smb.conf.

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that @@ -87,11 +87,11 @@ socket. See the socket options parameter in the smb.conf manual page for the list of valid options.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    COMMANDS

    LSARPC

    lsaquery

    Query info policy

    lookupsids

    Resolve a list +

    COMMANDS

    LSARPC

    lsaquery

    Query info policy

    lookupsids

    Resolve a list of SIDs to usernames.

    lookupnames

    Resolve a list of usernames to SIDs. -

    enumtrusts

    Enumerate trusted domains

    enumprivs

    Enumerate privileges

    getdispname

    Get the privilege name

    lsaenumsid

    Enumerate the LSA SIDS

    lsaenumprivsaccount

    Enumerate the privileges of an SID

    lsaenumacctrights

    Enumerate the rights of an SID

    lsaenumacctwithright

    Enumerate accounts with a right

    lsaaddacctrights

    Add rights to an account

    lsaremoveacctrights

    Remove rights from an account

    lsalookupprivvalue

    Get a privilege value given its name

    lsaquerysecobj

    Query LSA security object

    LSARPC-DS

    dsroledominfo

    Get Primary Domain Information

    DFS

    dfsexist

    Query DFS support

    dfsadd

    Add a DFS share

    dfsremove

    Remove a DFS share

    dfsgetinfo

    Query DFS share info

    dfsenum

    Enumerate dfs shares

    REG

    shutdown

    Remote Shutdown

    abortshutdown

    Abort Shutdown

    SRVSVC

    srvinfo

    Server query info

    netshareenum

    Enumerate shares

    netfileenum

    Enumerate open files

    netremotetod

    Fetch remote time of day

    SAMR

    queryuser

    Query user info

    querygroup

    Query group info

    queryusergroups

    Query user groups

    querygroupmem

    Query group membership

    queryaliasmem

    Query alias membership

    querydispinfo

    Query display info

    querydominfo

    Query domain info

    enumdomusers

    Enumerate domain users

    enumdomgroups

    Enumerate domain groups

    enumalsgroups

    Enumerate alias groups

    createdomuser

    Create domain user

    samlookupnames

    Look up names

    samlookuprids

    Look up names

    deletedomuser

    Delete domain user

    samquerysecobj

    Query SAMR security object

    getdompwinfo

    Retrieve domain password info

    lookupdomain

    Look up domain

    SPOOLSS

    adddriver <arch> <config> [<version>]

    +

    enumtrusts

    Enumerate trusted domains

    enumprivs

    Enumerate privileges

    getdispname

    Get the privilege name

    lsaenumsid

    Enumerate the LSA SIDS

    lsaenumprivsaccount

    Enumerate the privileges of an SID

    lsaenumacctrights

    Enumerate the rights of an SID

    lsaenumacctwithright

    Enumerate accounts with a right

    lsaaddacctrights

    Add rights to an account

    lsaremoveacctrights

    Remove rights from an account

    lsalookupprivvalue

    Get a privilege value given its name

    lsaquerysecobj

    Query LSA security object

    LSARPC-DS

    dsroledominfo

    Get Primary Domain Information

    DFS

    dfsexist

    Query DFS support

    dfsadd

    Add a DFS share

    dfsremove

    Remove a DFS share

    dfsgetinfo

    Query DFS share info

    dfsenum

    Enumerate dfs shares

    REG

    shutdown

    Remote Shutdown

    abortshutdown

    Abort Shutdown

    SRVSVC

    srvinfo

    Server query info

    netshareenum

    Enumerate shares

    netfileenum

    Enumerate open files

    netremotetod

    Fetch remote time of day

    SAMR

    queryuser

    Query user info

    querygroup

    Query group info

    queryusergroups

    Query user groups

    querygroupmem

    Query group membership

    queryaliasmem

    Query alias membership

    querydispinfo

    Query display info

    querydominfo

    Query domain info

    enumdomusers

    Enumerate domain users

    enumdomgroups

    Enumerate domain groups

    enumalsgroups

    Enumerate alias groups

    createdomuser

    Create domain user

    samlookupnames

    Look up names

    samlookuprids

    Look up names

    deletedomuser

    Delete domain user

    samquerysecobj

    Query SAMR security object

    getdompwinfo

    Retrieve domain password info

    lookupdomain

    Look up domain

    SPOOLSS

    adddriver <arch> <config> [<version>]

    Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by @@ -176,11 +176,11 @@ already be correctly installed on the print server.

    See also the enumprinters and enumdrivers commands for obtaining a list of of installed printers and drivers.

    addform

    Add form

    setform

    Set form

    getform

    Get form

    deleteform

    Delete form

    enumforms

    Enumerate form

    setprinter

    Set printer comment

    setprinterdata

    Set REG_SZ printer data

    setprintername <printername> - <newprintername>

    Set printer name

    rffpcnex

    Rffpcnex test

    NETLOGON

    logonctrl2

    Logon Control 2

    logonctrl

    Logon Control

    samsync

    Sam Synchronisation

    samdeltas

    Query Sam Deltas

    samlogon

    Sam Logon

    GENERAL COMMANDS

    debuglevel

    Set the current + <newprintername>

    Set printer name

    rffpcnex

    Rffpcnex test

    NETLOGON

    logonctrl2

    Logon Control 2

    logonctrl

    Logon Control

    samsync

    Sam Synchronisation

    samdeltas

    Query Sam Deltas

    samlogon

    Sam Logon

    GENERAL COMMANDS

    debuglevel

    Set the current debug level used to log information.

    help (?)

    Print a listing of all known commands or extended help on a particular command.

    quit (exit)

    Exit rpcclient - .

    BUGS

    rpcclient is designed as a developer testing tool + .

    BUGS

    rpcclient is designed as a developer testing tool and may not be robust in certain areas (such as command line parsing). It has been known to generate a core dump upon failures when invalid parameters where passed to the interpreter.

    From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:

    WARNING! The MSRPC over SMB code has @@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ versions of smbd(8) and rpcclient(1) that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found or reported to Microsoft are fixed in Service Packs, which may - result in incompatibilities.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + result in incompatibilities.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html 2006-01-29 10:16:16.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html 2006-07-06 05:17:51.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -samba

    Name

    samba — A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX

    Synopsis

    samba

    DESCRIPTION

    The Samba software suite is a collection of programs +samba

    Name

    samba — A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX

    Synopsis

    samba

    DESCRIPTION

    The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the Server Message Block (commonly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for UNIX systems. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the Common Internet File System (CIFS). For a @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ smbmnt(8)

    smbmount,smbumount and smbmnt are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux.

    smbcquotas(1)

    smbcquotas is a tool that - can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5.

    COMPONENTS

    The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each + can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5.

    COMPONENTS

    The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each component is described in a separate manual page. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages of those components that you use. If the @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch.

    If you require help, visit the Samba webpage at http://www.samba.org/ and explore the many option available to you. -

    AVAILABILITY

    The Samba software suite is licensed under the +

    AVAILABILITY

    The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License(GPL). A copy of that license should have come with the package in the file COPYING. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba suite, but @@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ the README file that comes with Samba.

    If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, at - http://lists.samba.org.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the - Samba suite.

    CONTRIBUTIONS

    If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, + http://lists.samba.org.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the + Samba suite.

    CONTRIBUTIONS

    If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you join the Samba mailing list at http://lists.samba.org.

    If you have patches to submit, visit http://devel.samba.org/ for information on how to do it properly. We prefer patches - in diff -u format.

    CONTRIBUTORS

    Contributors to the project are now too numerous + in diff -u format.

    CONTRIBUTORS

    Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users. To see a full list, look at the change-log in the source package @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ http://cvs.samba.org/ for the contributors to Samba post-CVS. CVS is the Open Source source code control system used by the Samba Team to develop - Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:22.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:54.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -smbcacls

    Name

    smbcacls — Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names

    Synopsis

    smbcacls {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-a acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [--numeric] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbcacls program manipulates NT Access Control - Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares.

    OPTIONS

    The following options are available to the smbcacls program. +smbcacls

    Name

    smbcacls — Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names

    Synopsis

    smbcacls {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-a acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [--numeric] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbcacls program manipulates NT Access Control + Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares.

    OPTIONS

    The following options are available to the smbcacls program. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT

    -a acls

    Add the ACLs specified to the ACL list. Existing access control entries are unchanged.

    -M acls

    Modify the mask value (permissions) for the ACLs specified on the command line. An error will be printed for each @@ -48,11 +48,11 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -

    ACL FORMAT

    The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by +

    ACL FORMAT

    The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following:

     
     REVISION:<revision number>
     OWNER:<sid or name>
    @@ -78,13 +78,13 @@
     	file permissions of the same name. 

    • R - Allow read access

    • W - Allow write access

    • X - Execute permission on the object

    • D - Delete the object

    • P - Change permissions

    • O - Take ownership

    The following combined permissions can be specified:

    • READ - Equivalent to 'RX' permissions

    • CHANGE - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions

    • FULL - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' - permissions

    EXIT STATUS

    The smbcacls program sets the exit status + permissions

    EXIT STATUS

    The smbcacls program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values.

    If the operation succeeded, smbcacls returns and exit status of 0. If smbcacls couldn't connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    smbcacls was written by Andrew Tridgell diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:25.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:55.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ smbclient

    Name

    smbclient — ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources - on servers

    Synopsis

    smbclient [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-L <netbios name>] [-U username] [-I destinationIP] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-k] [-P] [-c <command>]

    smbclient {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logdir] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbclient is a client that can + on servers

    Synopsis

    smbclient [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-L <netbios name>] [-U username] [-I destinationIP] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-k] [-P] [-c <command>]

    smbclient {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logdir] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbclient is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see ftp(1)). Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server - and so on.

    OPTIONS

    servicename

    servicename is the name of the service + and so on.

    OPTIONS

    servicename

    servicename is the name of the service you want to use on the server. A service name takes the form //server/service where server is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ rpcclient to prompt for a password and type it in directly.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. +to setting the parameter in the smb.conf file. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in smb.conf.

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that @@ -207,12 +207,18 @@ date saved in the tar file. Directories currently do not get their creation dates restored properly.

  • I - Include files and directories. Is the default behavior when filenames are specified above. Causes - tar files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore + files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded). See example below. Filename globbing - works in one of two ways. See r below.

  • X - Exclude files and directories. - Causes tar files to be excluded from an extract or create. See + works in one of two ways. See r below.

  • X - Exclude files and directories. + Causes files to be excluded from an extract or create. See example below. Filename globbing works in one of two ways now. - See r below.

  • b - Blocksize. Must be followed + See r below.

  • F - File containing a list of files and directories. + The F causes the name following the tarfile to + create to be read as a filename that contains a list of files and directories to + be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded). + See example below. Filename globbing works in one of two ways. + See r below. +

  • b - Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks.

  • g - Incremental. Only back up @@ -246,13 +252,14 @@ users/docs.

    smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar users/docs

    Create the same tar file as above, but now use a DOS path name.

    smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -tc backup.tar - users\edocs

    Create a tar file of all the files and directories in + users\edocs

    Create a tar file of the files listed in the file tarlist.

    smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -TcF + backup.tar tarlist

    Create a tar file of all the files and directories in the share.

    smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar *

  • -D initial directory

    Change to initial directory before starting. Probably only of any use with the tar -T option.

    -c command string

    command string is a semicolon-separated list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin. -N is implied by -c.

    This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin - to the server, e.g. -c 'print -'.

    OPERATIONS

    Once the client is running, the user is presented with + to the server, e.g. -c 'print -'.

    OPERATIONS

    Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt :

    smb:\>

    The backslash ("\\") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed.

    The prompt indicates that the client is ready and waiting to @@ -387,14 +394,14 @@ archive bit setting (this is the default mode). In incremental mode, tar will only back up files with the archive bit set. In reset mode, tar will reset the archive bit on all files it backs up (implies - read/write share).

    NOTES

    Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, + read/write share).

    NOTES

    Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, passwords, share names (AKA service names) and machine names. If you fail to connect try giving all parameters in uppercase.

    It is often necessary to use the -n option when connecting to some types of servers. For example OS/2 LanManager insists on a valid NetBIOS name being used, so you need to supply a valid name that would be known to the server.

    smbclient supports long file names where the server - supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above.

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The variable USER may contain the + supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above.

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The variable USER may contain the username of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords.

    The variable PASSWD may contain @@ -404,7 +411,7 @@ the path, executed with system(), which the client should connect to instead of connecting to a server. This functionality is primarily intended as a development aid, and works best when using a LMHOSTS - file

    INSTALLATION

    The location of the client program is a matter for + file

    INSTALLATION

    The location of the client program is a matter for individual system administrators. The following are thus suggestions only.

    It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the /usr/local/samba/bin/ or @@ -415,11 +422,11 @@ and writeable only by the user.

    To test the client, you will need to know the name of a running SMB/CIFS server. It is possible to run smbd(8) as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) - would provide a suitable test server.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a + would provide a suitable test server.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a specified log file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line.

    The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the client. If you have problems, - set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html 2006-01-29 10:16:20.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html 2006-07-06 05:17:53.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smb.conf

    Name

    smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite

    SYNOPSIS

    +smb.conf

    Name

    smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite

    SYNOPSIS

    The smb.conf file is a configuration file for the Samba suite. smb.conf contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The smb.conf file is designed to be configured and administered by the swat(8) program. The @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as create masks are numeric. -

    SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

    +

    SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

    Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as a “share”). The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes. @@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ The following sample section defines a file space share. The user has write access to the path /home/bar. The share is accessed via the share name foo:

     	[foo]
    -	path = /home/bar
    -	read only = no
    +	path = /home/bar
    +	read only = no
     

    The following sample section defines a printable share. The share is read-only, but printable. That is, @@ -64,12 +64,12 @@ ok parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):

     	[aprinter]
    -	path = /usr/spool/public
    -	read only = yes
    -	printable = yes
    -	guest ok = yes
    +	path = /usr/spool/public
    +	read only = yes
    +	printable = yes
    +	guest ok = yes
     

    -

    SPECIAL SECTIONS

    The [global] section

    +

    SPECIAL SECTIONS

    The [global] section

    Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections that do not specifically define certain items. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information.

    The [homes] section

    @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:

     [homes]
    -read only = no
    +read only = no
     

    An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be @@ -137,9 +137,9 @@ it. A typical [printers] entry looks like this:

     [printers]
    -path = /usr/spool/public
    -guest ok = yes
    -printable = yes
    +path = /usr/spool/public
    +guest ok = yes
    +printable = yes
     

    All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. @@ -160,7 +160,31 @@ On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use printcap name = lpstat to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the printcap name option for more details. -

    PARAMETERS

    Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.

    +

    USERSHARES

    Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete + their own share definitions has been added. This capability is called usershares and + is controlled by a set of parameters in the section of the smb.conf. + The relevant parameters are : +

    usershare allow guests

    Controls if usershares can permit guest access.

    usershare max shares

    Maximum number of user defined shares allowed.

    usershare owner only

    If set only directories owned by the sharing user can be shared.

    usershare path

    Points to the directory containing the user defined share definitions. + The filesystem permissions on this directory control who can create user defined shares.

    usershare prefix allow list

    Comma-separated list of abolute pathnames restricting what directories + can be shared. Only directories below the pathnames in this list are permitted.

    usershare prefix deny list

    Comma-separated list of abolute pathnames restricting what directories + can be shared. Directories below the pathnames in this list are prohibited.

    usershare template share

    Names a pre-existing share used as a template for creating new usershares. + All other share parameters not specified in the user defined share definition + are copied from this named share.

    To allow members of the UNIX group foo to create user defined + shares, create the directory to contain the share definitions as follows: +

    Become root:

    +mkdir /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    +chgrp foo /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    +chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    +

    Then add the parameters + +

    +	usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    +	usershare max shares = 10 # (or the desired number of shares)
    +

    + + to the global + section of your smb.conf. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares + using the following commands.

    net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]

    To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.

    net usershare delete sharename

    To delete a user defined share.

    net usershare list wildcard-sharename

    To list user defined shares.

    net usershare info wildcard-sharename

    To print information about user defined shares.

    PARAMETERS

    Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.

    Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e.g., security). Some parameters are usable in all sections (e.g., create mask). All others are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be @@ -172,7 +196,7 @@ Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym. -

    VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS

    +

    VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS

    Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions. For example the option “path = /tmp/%u” is interpreted as “path = /tmp/john” if the user connected with the username john. @@ -229,8 +253,8 @@

    default case = upper/lower

    controls what the default case is for new filenames (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem). Default lower. IMPORTANT NOTE: This option will be used to modify the case of - all incoming client filenames, not just new filenames if the options case sensitive = yes, preserve case = No, - short preserve case = No are set. This change is needed as part of the + all incoming client filenames, not just new filenames if the options case sensitive = yes, preserve case = No, + short preserve case = No are set. This change is needed as part of the optimisations for directories containing large numbers of files.

    preserve case = yes/no

    controls whether new files (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem) are created with the case @@ -276,8 +300,8 @@

  • If the service is a guest service, a connection is made as the username given in the guest account = for the service, irrespective of the supplied password. -

  • EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER

    abort shutdown script (G)

    This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that - should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the shutdown script.

    If the connected user posseses the SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege, +

    EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER

    abort shutdown script (G)

    This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that + should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the shutdown script.

    If the connected user posseses the SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege, right, this command will be run as user.

    Default: abort shutdown script =

    Example: abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c @@ -327,16 +351,13 @@ directory hierarchy in much the same was as Windows. This allows all members of a UNIX group to control the permissions on a file or directory they have group ownership on.

    - This parameter is best used with the inherit owner option and also + This parameter is best used with the inherit owner option and also on on a share containing directories with the UNIX setgid bit bit set on them, which causes new files and directories created within it to inherit the group ownership from the containing directory.

    - This is a new parameter introduced in Samba 3.0.20. -

    - This can be particularly useful to allow groups to manage their own security on a part - of the filesystem they have group ownership of, removing the bottleneck of having only - the user owner or superuser able to reset permissions. + This is parameter has been marked deprecated in Samba 3.0.23. The same behavior is now + implemented by the dos filemode option.

    Default: acl group control = no

    acl map full control (S)

    This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8)maps a POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), @@ -362,6 +383,16 @@

    Example: add machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /var/lib/nobody -s /bin/false %u +

    add port command (G)

    Samba 3.0.23 introduces support for adding printer ports + remotely using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard". + This option defines an external program to be executed when + smbd receives a request to add a new Port to the system. + he script is passed two parameters: +

    • port name

    • device URI

    The deviceURI is in the for of socket://<hostname>[:<portnumber>] + or lpd://<hostname>/<queuename>.

    Default: add port command = + +

    Example: add port command = /etc/samba/scripts/addport.sh +

    add printer command (G)

    With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the @@ -401,7 +432,7 @@ uid == 0).

    When executed, smbd will automatically invoke the - add share command with four parameters. + add share command with five parameters.

    • configFile - the location of the global smb.conf file.

    • shareName - the name of the new @@ -410,9 +441,13 @@ directory on disk.

    • comment - comment string to associate with the new share. +

    • max + connections + Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this + share.

    This parameter is only used for add file shares. To add printer shares, - see the addprinter command. + see the addprinter command.

    Default: add share command =

    Example: add share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare @@ -429,16 +464,16 @@ ON DEMAND when a user accesses the Samba server.

    In order to use this option, smbd(8) must NOT be set to - security = share and add user script + security = share and add user script must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of %u, which expands into the UNIX user name to create.

    When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in - the SMB protocol) time, smbd(8) contacts the password server + the SMB protocol) time, smbd(8) contacts the password server and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the authentication succeeds then smbd attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and - add user script is set then smbd will + add user script is set then smbd will call the specified script AS ROOT, expanding any %u argument to be the user name to create.

    @@ -446,8 +481,8 @@ continue on as though the UNIX user already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT accounts.

    - See also security, password server, - delete user script. + See also security, password server, + delete user script.

    Default: add user script =

    Example: add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u @@ -468,7 +503,7 @@ administrative privileges on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root).

    You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, - irrespective of file permissions.

    This parameter will not work with the security = share in + irrespective of file permissions.

    This parameter will not work with the security = share in Samba 3.0. This is by design.

    Default: admin users =

    Example: admin users = jason @@ -518,7 +553,7 @@ # (to disable roundups)

    allow trusted domains (G)

    - This option only takes effect when the security option is set to + This option only takes effect when the security option is set to server,domain or ads. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running @@ -553,7 +588,7 @@

    auth methods (G)

    This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods smbd - will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on security. + will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on security. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances. In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default setting should be adequate.

    @@ -581,33 +616,33 @@ to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It affects file service smbd(8) and name service nmbd(8) in a slightly different ways.

    For name service it causes nmbd to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the - interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter. nmbd + interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter. nmbd also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages. If this option is not set then nmbd will - service name requests on all of these sockets. If bind interfaces only is set then + service name requests on all of these sockets. If bind interfaces only is set then nmbd will check the source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the - interfaces parameter list. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it + interfaces parameter list. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows nmbd to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that - arrive through any interfaces not listed in the interfaces list. IP Source address + arrive through any interfaces not listed in the interfaces list. IP Source address spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for nmbd.

    - For file service it causes smbd(8) to bind only to the interface list given in the interfaces parameter. This restricts the networks that smbd will + For file service it causes smbd(8) to bind only to the interface list given in the interfaces parameter. This restricts the networks that smbd will serve to packets coming in those interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.

    - If bind interfaces only is set then unless the network address - 127.0.0.1 is added to the interfaces parameter list + If bind interfaces only is set then unless the network address + 127.0.0.1 is added to the interfaces parameter list smbpasswd(8) and swat(8) may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.

    To change a users SMB password, the smbpasswd by default connects to the localhost - 127.0.0.1 address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If - bind interfaces only is set then unless the network address - 127.0.0.1 is added to the interfaces parameter list then smbpasswd will fail to connect in it's default mode. smbpasswd can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using + bind interfaces only is set then unless the network address + 127.0.0.1 is added to the interfaces parameter list then smbpasswd will fail to connect in it's default mode. smbpasswd can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its smbpasswd(8) -r remote machine parameter, with remote machine set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.

    @@ -639,7 +674,11 @@ is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release.

    Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size, just the block size unit reported to the client. -

    No default

    browsable

    This parameter is a synonym for browseable.

    browseable (S)

    This controls whether this share is seen in +

    Default: block size = 1024 + +

    Example: block size = 4096 + +

    browsable

    This parameter is a synonym for browseable.

    browseable (S)

    This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.

    Default: browseable = yes

    browse list (G)

    This controls whether smbd(8) will serve a browse list to @@ -647,14 +686,20 @@ set to yes. You should never need to change this.

    Default: browse list = yes -

    casesignames

    This parameter is a synonym for case sensitive.

    case sensitive (S)

    See the discussion in the section name mangling.

    Default: case sensitive = no +

    casesignames

    This parameter is a synonym for case sensitive.

    case sensitive (S)

    See the discussion in the section name mangling.

    Default: case sensitive = no -

    change notify timeout (G)

    This SMB allows a client to tell a server to +

    change notify timeout (S)

    This SMB allows a client to tell a server to "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an smbd(8) daemon only performs such a scan on each requested directory once every change notify - timeout seconds.

    Default: change notify timeout = 60 + timeout seconds. Note that in 3.0.23 this has been changed to a + per-share parameter and setting this to zero prevents any change notify directory + scans completely on a share. This is to allow this paramter to be set to zero on + shares configured for very large directories, where a Windows client will re-scan + the entire directory after every delete operation (when deleting many files) due to + the change notify triggering. This is an extremely expensive operation on some + systems.

    Default: change notify timeout = 60

    Example: change notify timeout = 300 # Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes. @@ -669,7 +714,7 @@ uid == 0).

    When executed, smbd will automatically invoke the - change share command with four parameters. + change share command with five parameters.

    • configFile - the location of the global smb.conf file.

    • shareName - the name of the new @@ -678,6 +723,10 @@ directory on disk.

    • comment - comment string to associate with the new share. +

    • max + connections + Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this + share.

    This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions. To modify printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host. @@ -724,9 +773,9 @@

    client schannel (G)

    This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. - client schannel = no does not offer the schannel, - client schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not - enforce it, and client schannel = yes denies access + client schannel = no does not offer the schannel, + client schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not + enforce it, and client schannel = yes denies access if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel.

    Default: client schannel = auto @@ -750,7 +799,7 @@ when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via net view to list what shares are available.

    If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the - machine name then see the server string parameter.

    Default: comment = + machine name then see the server string parameter.

    Default: comment = # No comment

    Example: comment = Fred's Files @@ -785,13 +834,13 @@ write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.

    Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the - force create mode parameter which is set to 000 by default. + force create mode parameter which is set to 000 by default.

    - This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter directory mask + This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter directory mask for details.

    Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the - administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the security mask. + administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the security mask.

    Default: create mask = 0744

    Example: create mask = 0775 @@ -803,13 +852,13 @@ These values correspond to those used on Windows servers.

    For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using - csc policy = disable. + csc policy = disable.

    Default: csc policy = manual

    Example: csc policy = programs

    cups options (S)

    - This parameter is only applicable if printing is + This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups. Its value is a free form string of options passed directly to the cups library.

    @@ -828,7 +877,7 @@

    Example: cups options = "raw,media=a4,job-sheets=secret,secret"

    cups server (G)

    - This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups. + This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups.

    If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS client.conf. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons. @@ -852,7 +901,7 @@ Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on.

    - Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect.

    Default: debug hires timestamp = no

    debug pid (G)

    @@ -860,12 +909,12 @@ message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.

    - Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect.

    Default: debug pid = no

    timestamp logs

    This parameter is a synonym for debug timestamp.

    debug timestamp (G)

    Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high - debug level these timestamps can be distracting. This + debug level these timestamps can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off.

    Default: debug timestamp = yes @@ -873,13 +922,13 @@ Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on.

    - Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an effect.

    Default: debug uid = no -

    default case (S)

    See the section on name mangling - . Also note the short preserve case parameter.

    Default: default case = lower +

    default case (S)

    See the section on name mangling + . Also note the short preserve case parameter.

    Default: default case = lower -

    default devmode (S)

    This parameter is only applicable to printable services. +

    default devmode (S)

    This parameter is only applicable to printable services. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings. The device mode can only correctly be @@ -908,7 +957,7 @@ given in the parameter value (see example below).

    There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error.

    - Typically the default service would be a guest ok, read-only service.

    Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal + Typically the default service would be a guest ok, read-only service.

    Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like %S to make a wildcard service.

    Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for @@ -940,12 +989,12 @@ possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call.

    For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically deleted from underlying printing system. The - deleteprinter command defines a script to be run which + deleteprinter command defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer from the print system and from smb.conf. -

    The deleteprinter command is - automatically called with only one parameter: printer name. -

    Once the deleteprinter command has +

    The deleteprinter command is + automatically called with only one parameter: printer name. +

    Once the deleteprinter command has been executed, smbd will reparse the smb.conf to associated printer no longer exists. If the sharename is still valid, then smbd @@ -975,7 +1024,7 @@ the existing service.

    This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares, - see the deleteprinter command. + see the deleteprinter command.

    Default: delete share command =

    Example: delete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare @@ -1000,7 +1049,7 @@

    delete veto files (S)

    This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories - (see the veto files + (see the veto files option). If this option is set to no (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.

    If this option is set to yes, then Samba @@ -1008,7 +1057,7 @@ the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing - (e.g. .AppleDouble)

    Setting delete veto files = yes allows these + (e.g. .AppleDouble)

    Setting delete veto files = yes allows these directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).

    Default: delete veto files = no @@ -1020,7 +1069,7 @@

    This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21. It specifies in seconds the time that smbd will cache the output of a disk free query. If set to zero (the default) no caching is done. This allows a heavily - loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of dfree command scripts increasing the load. + loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of dfree command scripts increasing the load.

    By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done.

    No default

    Example: dfree cache time = dfree cache time = 60 @@ -1036,7 +1085,7 @@ function.

    In Samba version 3.0.21 this parameter has been changed to be a per-share parameter, and in addition the - parameter dfree cache time was added to allow the output of this script to be cached + parameter dfree cache time was added to allow the output of this script to be cached for systems under heavy load.

    The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried. @@ -1074,10 +1123,10 @@ created.

    The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the directory to modify it.

    Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode - created from this parameter with the value of the force directory mode parameter. + created from this parameter with the value of the force directory mode parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).

    Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce - a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the directory security mask.

    Default: directory mask = 0755 + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the directory security mask.

    Default: directory mask = 0755

    Example: directory mask = 0775 @@ -1086,7 +1135,7 @@ permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.

    This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not - in this mask from being modified. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with force directory security mode, which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND. + in this mask from being modified. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with force directory security mode, which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change.

    If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world @@ -1107,7 +1156,7 @@

    disable spoolss (G)

    Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using - Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by + Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by the parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window. It will @@ -1118,11 +1167,26 @@

    display charset (G)

    Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr and SWAT will use. - Should generally be the same as the unix charset. + Should generally be the same as the unix charset.

    Default: display charset = ASCII

    Example: display charset = UTF8 +

    dmapi support (S)

    This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to + determine whether a file is offline or not. This would typically + be used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that + automatically migrates files to tape. +

    Note that Samba infers the status of a file by examining the + events that a DMAPI application has registered interest in. This + heuristic is satisfactory for a number of hierarchical storage + systems, but there may be system for which it will fail. In this + case, Samba may erroneously report files to be offline. +

    This parameter is only available if a supported DMAPI + implementation was found at compilation time. It will only be used + if DMAPI is found to enabled on the system at run time. +

    +

    Default: dmapi support = no +

    dns proxy (G)

    Specifies that nmbd(8) when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server @@ -1135,7 +1199,7 @@

    domain logons (G)

    If set to yes, the Samba server will provide the netlogon service for Windows 9X network logons for the - workgroup it is in. + workgroup it is in. This will also cause the Samba server to act as a domain controller for NT4 style domain services. For more details on setting up this feature see the Domain Control chapter of the @@ -1146,25 +1210,25 @@ Tell smbd(8) to enable WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this option causes nmbd to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given - workgroup. Local master browsers in the same workgroup on + workgroup. Local master browsers in the same workgroup on broadcast-isolated subnets will give this nmbd their local browse lists, and then ask smbd(8) for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet.

    - Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this workgroup specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that - workgroup by default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting + Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this workgroup specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that + workgroup by default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This means that if this parameter is set and nmbd claims the - special name for a workgroup before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross + special name for a workgroup before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely and may fail.

    - If domain logons = yes, then the default behavior is to enable the - domain master parameter. If domain logons is not enabled (the - default setting), then neither will domain master be enabled by default. + If domain logons = yes, then the default behavior is to enable the + domain master parameter. If domain logons is not enabled (the + default setting), then neither will domain master be enabled by default.

    - When domain logons = Yes the default setting for this parameter is - Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If domain master = No, + When domain logons = Yes the default setting for this parameter is + Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If domain master = No, Samba will function as a BDC. In general, this parameter should be set to 'No' only on a BDC.

    Default: domain master = auto @@ -1189,11 +1253,10 @@ able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever - means) to modify the permissions on it. Note that a user + means) to modify the permissions (including ACL) on it. Note that a user belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to change permissions if the group is only granted read access. - Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions - are modified.

    Default: dos filemode = no + Ownership of the file/directory may also be changed.

    Default: dos filemode = no

    dos filetime resolution (S)

    Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter @@ -1237,7 +1300,7 @@ behavior in smbd for many years. However, certain Microsoft applications such as the Print Migrator tool require that the remote server support an [ADMIN$} file share. Disabling this parameter allows for creating - an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.

    Default: enable asu support = yes + an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.

    Default: enable asu support = no

    enable privileges (G)

    This parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either net rpc rights @@ -1248,16 +1311,7 @@ of the connected user.

    An example of how privileges can be used is to assign the right to join clients to a Samba controlled domain without providing root access to the server via smbd.

    Please read the extended description provided in the - Samba documentation before enabling this option.

    Default: enable privileges = no - -

    enable rid algorithm (G)

    This option is used to control whether or not smbd in Samba 3.0 should fallback - to the algorithm used by Samba 2.2 to generate user and group RIDs. The longterm - development goal is to remove the algorithmic mappings of RIDs altogether, but - this has proved to be difficult. This parameter is mainly provided so that - developers can turn the algorithm on and off and see what breaks. This parameter - should not be disabled by non-developers because certain features in Samba will fail - to work without it. -

    Default: enable rid algorithm = yes + Samba documentation.

    Default: enable privileges = yes

    encrypt passwords (G)

    This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and @@ -1278,7 +1332,7 @@

    In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly smbd(8) must either have access to a local smbpasswd(5) file (see the smbpasswd(8) program for information on how to set up - and maintain this file), or set the security = [server|domain|ads] parameter which + and maintain this file), or set the security = [server|domain|ads] parameter which causes smbd to authenticate against another server.

    Default: encrypt passwords = yes @@ -1354,7 +1408,7 @@ cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.

    When you set fake oplocks = yes, smbd(8) will - always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file.

    It is generally much better to use the real oplocks support rather + always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file.

    It is generally much better to use the real oplocks support rather than this parameter.

    If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see @@ -1363,6 +1417,16 @@ files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use this option carefully!

    Default: fake oplocks = no +

    fam change notify (G)

    This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the + FAM daemon change notifications in directories so that + SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes. +

    This parameter is only used when your system supports + change notification to user programs, using the FAM daemon. If the FAM + daemon is not running, this parameter is automatically disabled. The + kernel change notify + parameter will take precedence if it is also enabled. +

    Default: fam change notify = yes +

    follow symlinks (S)

    This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop smbd(8) from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this parameter to no prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being @@ -1404,7 +1468,7 @@ the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.

    This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this - mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with directory security mask, which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead + mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with directory security mask, which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead of an OR.

    Essentially, this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, @@ -1438,7 +1502,7 @@ that only users who are already in group sys will have their default primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All other users will retain their ordinary primary group.

    - If the force user parameter is also set the group specified in + If the force user parameter is also set the group specified in force group will override the primary group set in force user.

    Default: force group = @@ -1472,7 +1536,7 @@ the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box.

    This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this - mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with security mask, which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR. + mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with security mask, which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR.

    Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be on. @@ -1540,10 +1604,10 @@

    getwd cache (G)

    This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially - when the wide smbconfoptions parameter is set to no.

    Default: getwd cache = yes + when the wide smbconfoptions parameter is set to no.

    Default: getwd cache = yes

    guest account (G)

    This is a username which will be used for access - to services which are specified as guest ok (see below). Whatever privileges this + to services which are specified as guest ok (see below). Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. This user must exist in the password file, but does not require a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice @@ -1562,14 +1626,14 @@

    public

    This parameter is a synonym for guest ok.

    guest ok (S)

    If this parameter is yes for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. - Privileges will be those of the guest account.

    This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting - restrict anonymous = 2 -

    See the section below on security for more information about this option. + Privileges will be those of the guest account.

    This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting + restrict anonymous = 2 +

    See the section below on security for more information about this option.

    Default: guest ok = no

    only guest

    This parameter is a synonym for guest only.

    guest only (S)

    If this parameter is yes for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. - This parameter will have no effect if guest ok is not set for the service.

    See the section below on security for more information about this option. + This parameter will have no effect if guest ok is not set for the service.

    See the section below on security for more information about this option.

    Default: guest only = no

    hide dot files (S)

    This is a boolean parameter that controls whether @@ -1611,7 +1675,7 @@

    Default: hide unwriteable files = no

    homedir map (G)

    - If nis homedir is yes, and smbd(8) is also acting as a Win95/98 logon server + If nis homedir is yes, and smbd(8) is also acting as a Win95/98 logon server then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:

    @@ -1629,9 +1693,9 @@
     	If set to yes, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse
     	Dfs trees hosted on the server.
     	

    - See also the msdfs root share level parameter. For more information on + See also the msdfs root share level parameter. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in the book Samba3-HOWTO. -

    Default: host msdfs = no +

    Default: host msdfs = yes

    hostname lookups (G)

    Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead. An example place @@ -1641,7 +1705,7 @@

    Example: hostname lookups = yes -

    allow hosts

    This parameter is a synonym for hosts allow.

    hosts allow (S)

    A synonym for this parameter is allow hosts.

    This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited +

    allow hosts

    This parameter is a synonym for hosts allow.

    hosts allow (S)

    A synonym for this parameter is allow hosts.

    This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.

    If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting.

    You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For @@ -1651,7 +1715,7 @@ page hosts_access(5). Note that this man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will be given here also.

    Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always - be allowed access unless specifically denied by a hosts deny option.

    You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and + be allowed access unless specifically denied by a hosts deny option.

    You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The EXCEPT keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:

    Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one

    hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66

    Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask

    hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0

    Example 3: allow a couple of hosts

    hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur

    Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but @@ -1668,56 +1732,38 @@ list takes precedence.

    In the event that it is necessary to deny all by default, use the keyword ALL (or the netmask 0.0.0.0/0) and then explicitly specify - to the hosts allow = hosts allow parameter those hosts + to the hosts allow = hosts allow parameter those hosts that should be permitted access.

    Default: hosts deny = # none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)

    Example: hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au -

    hosts equiv (G)

    If this global parameter is a non-null string, - it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts - and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password. -

    This is not be confused with hosts allow which is about hosts - access to services and is more useful for guest services. - hosts equiv may be useful for NT clients which will - not supply passwords to Samba.

    Note

    The use of hosts equiv - can be a major security hole. This is because you are - trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to - get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the - hosts equiv option be only used if you really - know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust - your spouse and kids. And only if you really trust - them :-).

    Default: hosts equiv = -# no host equivalences - -

    Example: hosts equiv = hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv -

    idmap backend (G)

    The purpose of the idmap backend parameter is to allow idmap to NOT use the local idmap - tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings, but instead to obtain them from a common + tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings for unmapped SIDs, but instead to obtain them from a common LDAP backend. This way all domain members and controllers will have the same UID and GID to SID mappings. This avoids the risk of UID / GID inconsistencies across UNIX / Linux systems that are sharing information over protocols other than SMB/CIFS (ie: NFS).

    - An alternate method of SID to UID / GID mapping can be achieved using the idmap_rid + An alternate method of SID to UID / GID mapping can be achieved using the rid plug-in. This plug-in uses the account RID to derive the UID and GID by adding the RID to a base value specified. This utility requires that the parameter “allow trusted domains = No” must be specified, as it is not compatible with multiple domain environments. The idmap uid and idmap gid ranges must also be specified.

    - Finally, using the idmap_ad module, the UID and GID can directly + Finally, using the ad module, the UID and GID can directly be retrieved from an Active Directory LDAP Server that supports an - RFC2307 compliant LDAP schema. idmap_ad supports "Services for Unix" + RFC2307 compliant LDAP schema. ad supports "Services for Unix" (SFU) version 2.x and 3.0.

    Default: idmap backend =

    Example: idmap backend = ldap:ldap://ldapslave.example.com -

    Example: idmap backend = idmap_rid:BUILTIN=1000-1999,DOMNAME=2000-100000000 +

    Example: idmap backend = rid:"BUILTIN=1000-1999,DOMNAME=2000-100000000" -

    Example: idmap backend = idmap_ad +

    Example: idmap backend = ad

    winbind gid

    This parameter is a synonym for idmap gid.

    idmap gid (G)

    The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no @@ -1759,12 +1805,12 @@ roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user.

    Default: inherit owner = no

    inherit permissions (S)

    - The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by create mask, - directory mask, force create mode and force directory mode but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. + The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by create mask, + directory mask, force create mode and force directory mode but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this.

    New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including bits such as setgid.

    New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory. Their execute bits continue to be - determined by map archive, map hidden and map system as usual. + determined by map archive, map hidden and map system as usual.

    Note that the setuid bit is never set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).

    This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] @@ -1815,7 +1861,7 @@

    Example: invalid users = root fred admin @wheel

    iprint server (G)

    - This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to iprint. + This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to iprint.

    If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS client.conf. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons. @@ -1828,7 +1874,7 @@ packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a client is still present and responding.

    Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket - has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see socket options). + has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see socket options). Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.

    Default: keepalive = 300

    Example: keepalive = 600 @@ -1840,7 +1886,7 @@ change notification to user programs, using the F_NOTIFY fcntl.

    Default: kernel change notify = yes -

    kernel oplocks (G)

    For UNIXes that support kernel based oplocks +

    kernel oplocks (G)

    For UNIXes that support kernel based oplocks (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off.

    Kernel oplocks support allows Samba oplocks to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation @@ -1877,37 +1923,37 @@ tested as some other Samba code paths.

    Default: large readwrite = yes

    ldap admin dn (G)

    - The ldap admin dn defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact - the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The ldap admin dn is used + The ldap admin dn defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact + the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The ldap admin dn is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the private/secrets.tdb file. See the smbpasswd(8) man page for more information on how to accomplish this.

    - The ldap admin dn requires a fully specified DN. The ldap suffix is not appended to the ldap admin dn. + The ldap admin dn requires a fully specified DN. The ldap suffix is not appended to the ldap admin dn.

    No default

    ldap delete dn (G)

    This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba.

    Default: ldap delete dn = no -

    ldap group suffix (G)

    This parameters specifies the suffix that is +

    ldap group suffix (G)

    This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory. - If this parameter is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the - ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.

    Default: ldap group suffix = + If this parameter is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the + ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.

    Default: ldap group suffix =

    Example: ldap group suffix = ou=Groups

    ldap idmap suffix (G)

    This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings. If this parameter - is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix - string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a partial DN. + is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix + string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.

    Default: ldap idmap suffix =

    Example: ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap

    ldap machine suffix (G)

    It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of - ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the - ldap suffix string so use a partial DN. + ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the + ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.

    Default: ldap machine suffix =

    Example: ldap machine suffix = ou=Computers @@ -1917,24 +1963,12 @@ and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA.

    - The ldap passwd sync can be set to one of three values: + The ldap passwd sync can be set to one of three values:

    • Yes = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.

    • No = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.

    • Only = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest.

    Default: ldap passwd sync = no -

    ldap port (G)

    - This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the - --with-ldapsam option at compile time. -

    - This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact the - ldap server. The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636. -

    Default: ldap port = 636 -# if ldap ssl = on - -

    Default: ldap port = 389 -# if ldap ssl = off -

    ldap replication sleep (G)

    When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read-write master server. This server then replicates our changes back to the 'local' server, however the replication might take some seconds, @@ -1956,40 +1990,34 @@ counterparts in LDAP. UNIX has optimized functions to enumerate group membership. Sadly, other functions that are used to deal with user and group attributes lack such optimization.

    - o make Samba scale well in large environments, the ldapsam:trusted = yes + o make Samba scale well in large environments, the ldapsam:trusted = yes option assumes that the complete user and group database that is relevant to Samba is stored in LDAP with the standard posixAccount/posixGroup attributes. It further assumes that the Samba auxiliary object classes are stored together with the POSIX data in the same LDAP object. If these assumptions are met, - ldapsam:trusted = yes can be activated and Samba can completely bypass the + ldapsam:trusted = yes can be activated and Samba can completely bypass the NSS system to query user information. Optimized LDAP queries can greatly speed up domain logon and administration tasks. Depending on the size of the LDAP database a factor of 100 or more for common queries is easily achieved.

    Default: ldapsam:trusted = no -

    ldap server (G)

    This parameter is only available if Samba has been - configure to include the --with-ldapsam - option at compile time.

    This parameter should contain the FQDN of the ldap directory - server which should be queried to locate user account information. -

    Default: ldap server = localhost -

    ldap ssl (G)

    This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is NOT related to Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the --with-ssl option to the configure - script.

    The ldap ssl can be set to one of three values:

    • Off = Never + script.

      The ldap ssl can be set to one of three values:

      • Off = Never use SSL when querying the directory.

      • Start_tls = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.

      • On = Use SSL on the ldaps port when contacting the ldap server. Only available when the backwards-compatiblity --with-ldapsam option is specified - to configure. See passdb backend

      Default: ldap ssl = start_tls + to configure. See passdb backend

    Default: ldap ssl = start_tls

    ldap suffix (G)

    Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.

    - The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the ldap user suffix, - ldap group suffix, ldap machine suffix, and the - ldap idmap suffix. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the - ldap suffix. + The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the ldap user suffix, + ldap group suffix, ldap machine suffix, and the + ldap idmap suffix. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the + ldap suffix.

    Default: ldap suffix =

    Example: ldap suffix = dc=samba,dc=org @@ -2002,8 +2030,8 @@

    ldap user suffix (G)

    This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this parameter is unset, - the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix - string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a partial DN. + the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix + string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.

    Default: ldap user suffix =

    Example: ldap user suffix = ou=people @@ -2022,9 +2050,9 @@ or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read-ahead caches.

    It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access to shared executables.

    For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.

    - Currently, if kernel oplocks are supported then + Currently, if kernel oplocks are supported then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to - yes). Note also, the oplocks + yes). Note also, the oplocks parameter must be set to yes on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect.

    Default: level2 oplocks = yes @@ -2036,27 +2064,27 @@ If set to no Samba will never produce these broadcasts. If set to yes Samba will produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter - lm interval. If set to auto + lm interval. If set to auto Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter - lm interval.

    Default: lm announce = auto + lm interval.

    Default: lm announce = auto

    Example: lm announce = yes

    lm interval (G)

    If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the - lm announce parameter) then this + lm announce parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be - made despite the setting of the lm announce + made despite the setting of the lm announce parameter.

    Default: lm interval = 60

    Example: lm interval = 120

    load printers (G)

    A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. - See the printers section for + See the printers section for more details.

    Default: load printers = yes

    local master (G)

    This option allows nmbd(8) to try and become a local master browser @@ -2071,7 +2099,7 @@

    lock dir

    This parameter is a synonym for lock directory.

    lock directory (G)

    This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the - max connections option. + max connections option.

    Default: lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks

    Example: lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks @@ -2098,7 +2126,7 @@

    lock spin time (G)

    The time in microseconds that smbd should pause before attempting to gain a failed lock. See - lock spin count for more details.

    Default: lock spin time = 10 + lock spin count for more details.

    Default: lock spin time = 10

    log file (G)

    This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file). @@ -2117,11 +2145,11 @@

    logon drive (G)

    This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be - connected (see logon home) and is only used by NT + connected (see logon home) and is only used by NT Workstations.

    Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server. -

    Default: logon drive = z: +

    Default: logon drive =

    Example: logon drive = h: @@ -2144,12 +2172,12 @@ in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to \\server\share when a user does net use /home but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.

    - Note that in prior versions of Samba, the logon path was returned rather than + Note that in prior versions of Samba, the logon path was returned rather than logon home. This broke net use /home but allowed profiles outside the home directory. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick.

    - Disable this feature by setting logon home = "" - using the empty string. + Disable this feature by setting logon home = "" - using the empty string.

    This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.

    Default: logon home = \\%N\%U @@ -2160,7 +2188,7 @@ This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the - logon home parameter. + logon home parameter.

    This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", (desktop, start menu, network neighborhood, programs and other @@ -2189,7 +2217,7 @@ provided system tool.

    Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a domain controller.

    Disable the use of roaming profiles by setting the value of this parameter to the empty string. For - example, logon path = "". Take note that even if the default setting + example, logon path = "". Take note that even if the default setting in the smb.conf file is the empty string, any value specified in the user account settings in the passdb backend will over-ride the effect of setting this parameter to null. Disabling of all roaming profile use requires that the user account settings must also be blank. @@ -2206,7 +2234,7 @@ must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended.

    The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] service. If the [netlogon] - service specifies a path of /usr/local/samba/netlogon, and logon script = STARTUP.BAT, then the file that will be downloaded is: + service specifies a path of /usr/local/samba/netlogon, and logon script = STARTUP.BAT, then the file that will be downloaded is:

     	/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT
     

    @@ -2246,7 +2274,7 @@ will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.

    Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.

    Default: lppause command = # Currently no default value is given to - this string, unless the value of the printing + this string, unless the value of the printing parameter is SYSV, in which case the default is : lp -i %p-%j -H hold or if the value of the printing parameter is @@ -2294,11 +2322,11 @@ executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.

    This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See - also the lppause command parameter.

    If a %p is given then the printer name + also the lppause command parameter.

    If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place. A %j is replaced with the job number (an integer).

    Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lpresume command as the PATH may not - be available to the server.

    See also the printing parameter.

    Default: Currently no default value is given + be available to the server.

    See also the printing parameter.

    Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the printing parameter is SYSV, in which case the default is :

    lp -i %p-%j -H resume

    or if the value of the printing parameter is SOFTQ, then the default is:

    qstat -s -j%j -r

    Default: lpresume command = lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2 @@ -2321,18 +2349,18 @@

    Default: lprm command = determined by printing parameter

    machine password timeout (G)

    - If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the security = domain parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change + If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the security = domain parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called private/secrets.tdb . This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.

    See also smbpasswd(8), - and the security = domain parameter. + and the security = domain parameter.

    Default: machine password timeout = 604800

    magic output (S)

    This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the - magic script parameter below). + magic script parameter below).

    Warning

    If two clients use the same magic script in the same directory the output file content is undefined.

    Default: magic output = <magic script name>.out @@ -2345,7 +2373,7 @@ executed on behalf of the connected user.

    Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.

    If the script generates output, output will be sent to - the file specified by the magic output + the file specified by the magic output parameter (see above).

    Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable @@ -2366,7 +2394,7 @@ So to map html to htm you would use:

    - mangled map = (*.html *.htm). + mangled map = (*.html *.htm).

    One very useful case is to remove the annoying ;1 off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of @@ -2378,7 +2406,7 @@

    mangled names (S)

    This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, - or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.

    See the section on name mangling for + or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.

    See the section on name mangling for details on how to control the mangling process.

    If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:

    • The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters @@ -2388,7 +2416,7 @@ extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters.

      Note that the character to use may be specified using - the mangling char + the mangling char option, if you don't like '~'.

    • Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as @@ -2412,7 +2440,7 @@

      Example: mangle prefix = 4

    mangling char (S)

    This controls what character is used as - the magic character in name mangling. The + the magic character in name mangling. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.

    Default: mangling char = ~ @@ -2445,23 +2473,23 @@ any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...

    - Note that this requires the create mask parameter to be set such that owner + Note that this requires the create mask parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter - create mask for details. + create mask for details.

    Default: map archive = yes

    map hidden (S)

    This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.

    - Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the world execute - bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter create mask + Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the world execute + bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter create mask for details.

    No default

    map read only (S)

    This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem.

    This parameter can take three different values, which tell smbd(8) how to display the read only attribute on files, where either - store dos attributes is set to No, or no extended attribute is - present. If store dos attributes is set to yes then this + store dos attributes is set to No, or no extended attribute is + present. If store dos attributes is set to yes then this parameter is ignored. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21.

    The three settings are :

    • Yes - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of the user @@ -2474,18 +2502,18 @@ is reported as being set on the file.

    • No - The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions, and can only be set by - the store dos attributes method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs. + the store dos attributes method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs.

    Default: map read only = yes

    map system (S)

    This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.

    - Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the group + Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 010). See the parameter - create mask for details. + create mask for details.

    Default: map system = no -

    map to guest (G)

    This parameter is only useful in SECURITY = +

    map to guest (G)

    This parameter is only useful in SECURITY = security modes other than security = share - i.e. user, server, and domain.

    This parameter can take four different values, which tell @@ -2495,9 +2523,9 @@ default.

  • Bad User - Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and - mapped into the guest account.

  • Bad Password - Means user logins + mapped into the guest account.

  • Bad Password - Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped - into the guest account. Note that + into the guest account. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and will not know the reason they cannot access files they think @@ -2527,7 +2555,7 @@ If max connections is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.

    Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files will be stored in - the directory specified by the lock directory option.

    Default: max connections = 0 + the directory specified by the lock directory option.

    Default: max connections = 0

    Example: max connections = 10 @@ -2617,16 +2645,16 @@ never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.

    Default: max ttl = 259200

  • max wins ttl (G)

    This option tells smbd(8) when acting as a WINS server - (wins support = yes) what the maximum + (wins support = yes) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that nmbd will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).

    Default: max wins ttl = 518400

    max xmit (G)

    This option controls the maximum packet size - that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which - is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance - with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. -

    Default: max xmit = 65535 + that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which + matches the behavior of Windows 2000. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. + You should never need to change this parameter from its default value. +

    Default: max xmit = 16644

    Example: max xmit = 8192 @@ -2678,18 +2706,18 @@

    min protocol (G)

    The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer - to the max protocol + to the max protocol parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in source/smbd/negprot.c for a listing of known protocol dialects supported by clients.

    If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should - also refer to the lanman auth parameter. Otherwise, you should never need + also refer to the lanman auth parameter. Otherwise, you should never need to change this parameter.

    Default: min protocol = CORE

    Example: min protocol = NT1

    min wins ttl (G)

    This option tells nmbd(8) - when acting as a WINS server (wins support = yes) what the minimum 'time to live' + when acting as a WINS server (wins support = yes) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that nmbd will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).

    Default: min wins ttl = 21600 @@ -2699,7 +2727,7 @@ the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using the SMB-Dfs protocol.

    Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares. Take a look at the - msdfs root and host msdfs + msdfs root and host msdfs options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.

    No default

    Example: msdfs proxy = \otherserver\someshare

    msdfs root (S)

    If set to yes, Samba treats the @@ -2708,7 +2736,7 @@ Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form msdfs:serverA\\shareA,serverB\\shareB and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on - Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.

    Default: msdfs root = no + Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.

    Default: msdfs root = yes

    name cache timeout (G)

    Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If @@ -2735,9 +2763,9 @@ useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching _ldap._tcp.domain.

  • wins : Query a name with - the IP address listed in the WINSSERVER parameter. If no WINS server has + the IP address listed in the WINSSERVER parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored.

  • bcast : Do a broadcast on - each of the known local interfaces listed in the interfaces + each of the known local interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet.

  • The example below will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined @@ -2789,15 +2817,17 @@ it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in - homedir map and return the server + homedir map and return the server listed there.

    Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server.

    Default: nis homedir = no

    nt acl support (S)

    This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will attempt to map - UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. - This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases - prior to 2.2.2.

    Default: nt acl support = yes + UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. The UNIX + permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and + group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or + directories. This parameter was formally a global parameter in + releases prior to 2.2.2.

    Default: nt acl support = yes

    ntlm auth (G)

    This parameter determines whether or not smbd(8) will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response. @@ -2826,7 +2856,7 @@ should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba - always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of encrypt passwords = yes. The reason + always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of encrypt passwords = yes. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption.

    Default: obey pam restrictions = no @@ -2837,13 +2867,21 @@ client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling this parameter will force the server to only use the login names from the user list and is only really - useful in security = share level security.

    Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce + useful in security = share level security.

    Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for the [homes] section. To get around this you could use user = %S which means your user list will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user.

    Default: only user = no +

    open files database hash size (G)

    This parameter was added in Samba 3.0.23. This is an internal tuning parameter that sets + the hash size of the tdb used for the open file databases. The presence of this parameter + allows tuning of the system for very large (thousands of concurrent users) Samba setups. + The default setting of this parameter should be sufficient for most normal environments. + It is advised not to change this parameter unless advised to by a Samba Team member.

    Default: open files database hash size = 10007 + +

    Example: open files database hash size = 1338457 +

    oplock break wait time (G)

    This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can @@ -2877,11 +2915,11 @@ docs/ directory.

    Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share. See - the veto oplock files parameter. On some systems + the veto oplock files parameter. On some systems oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the - kernel oplocks parameter for details. + kernel oplocks parameter for details.

    Default: oplocks = yes

    os2 driver map (G)

    The parameter is used to define the absolute @@ -2897,7 +2935,7 @@

    os level (G)

    This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this parameter determines whether nmbd(8) -has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the workgroup in the local broadcast area.

    +has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the workgroup in the local broadcast area.

    Note :By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes. This parameter is largely auto-configured in the Samba-3 @@ -2911,9 +2949,9 @@ this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in - passwd program. + passwd program. It should be possible to enable this without changing your - passwd chat parameter for most setups.

    Default: pam password change = no + passwd chat parameter for most setups.

    Default: pam password change = no

    panic action (G)

    This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either smbd(8) or smbd(8) crashes. This is usually used to @@ -2942,10 +2980,10 @@ backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.

  • tdbsam - The TDB based password storage backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb - in the private dir directory.

  • ldapsam - The LDAP based passdb + in the private dir directory.

  • ldapsam - The LDAP based passdb backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to ldap://localhost)

    LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be done using either - Start-TLS (see ldap ssl) or by + Start-TLS (see ldap ssl) or by specifying ldaps:// in the URL argument.

    Multiple servers may also be specified in double-quotes, if your LDAP libraries supports the LDAP URL notation. @@ -2983,23 +3021,21 @@ This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user's primary group. -

    - This parameter is set to "yes" by default, but this is about to change in the future. -

    Default: passdb expand explicit = yes +

    Default: passdb expand explicit = no

  • passwd chat (G)

    This string controls the "chat" conversation that takes places between smbd(8) and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that smbd(8) uses to determine what to send to the - passwd program and what to expect back. If the expected output is not + passwd program and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed.

    This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS - etc).

    Note that this parameter only is only used if the unix password sync parameter is set to yes. This sequence is + etc).

    Note that this parameter only is only used if the unix password sync parameter is set to yes. This sequence is then called AS ROOT when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password without knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of - NIS/YP, this means that the passwd program must + NIS/YP, this means that the passwd program must be executed on the NIS master.

    The string can contain the macro %n which is substituted for the new password. The chat sequence can also contain the standard @@ -3008,7 +3044,7 @@ a '*' which matches any sequence of characters. Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single string.

    If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, if the - expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.

    If the pam password change parameter is set to yes, the + expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.

    If the pam password change parameter is set to yes, the chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions.

    Default: passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n*new*password* %n\n *changed* @@ -3019,13 +3055,13 @@ parameter is run in debug mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the smbd(8) log with a - debug level + debug level of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the smbd log. It is available to help Samba admins debug their passwd chat scripts when calling the passwd program and should be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the - pam password change + pam password change paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.

    Default: passwd chat debug = no

    passwd chat timeout (G)

    This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial @@ -3072,7 +3108,7 @@ process a new connection.

    A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.

    This parameter is used only when using plain-text passwords. It is not at all used when encrypted passwords as in use (that is the default - since samba-3.0.0). Use this only when encrypt passwords = No.

    Default: password level = 0 + since samba-3.0.0). Use this only when encrypt passwords = No.

    Default: password level = 0

    Example: password level = 4 @@ -3088,7 +3124,7 @@ Samba will use the standard LDAP port of tcp/389. Note that port numbers have no effect on password servers for Windows NT 4.0 domains or netbios connections.

    If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the - parameter name resolve order and so may resolved + parameter name resolve order and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter.

    The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode.

    Note

    Using a password server means your UNIX box (running @@ -3150,7 +3186,7 @@ on this connection. Any occurrences of %m will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting - up pseudo home directories for users.

    Note that this path will be based on root dir + up pseudo home directories for users.

    Note that this path will be based on root dir if one was specified.

    Default: path =

    Example: path = /home/fred @@ -3184,13 +3220,13 @@ preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &

    Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)

    - See also preexec close and postexec. + See also preexec close and postexec.

    Default: preexec =

    Example: preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log

    preexec close (S)

    - This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from preexec + This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from preexec should close the service being connected to.

    Default: preexec close = no @@ -3199,7 +3235,7 @@

    If this is set to yes, on startup, nmbd will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election. It is recommended that this - parameter is used in conjunction with domain master = yes, so that + parameter is used in conjunction with domain master = yes, so that nmbd can guarantee becoming a domain master.

    Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) @@ -3213,7 +3249,7 @@ for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible.

    Note that if you just want all printers in your - printcap file loaded then the load printers + printcap file loaded then the load printers option is easier.

    Default: preload = @@ -3227,7 +3263,7 @@

    preserve case (S)

    This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if - they are forced to be the default case. + they are forced to be the default case.

    See the section on NAME MANGLING for a fuller discussion.

    Default: preserve case = yes @@ -3236,7 +3272,7 @@ clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service.

    Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling - of print data. The read only parameter controls only non-printing access to + of print data. The read only parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource.

    Default: printable = no

    printcap cache time (G)

    This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing @@ -3254,7 +3290,7 @@ /etc/printcap). See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this.

    To use the CUPS printing interface set printcap name = cups . This should - be supplemented by an addtional setting printing = cups in the [global] + be supplemented by an addtional setting printing = cups in the [global] section. printcap name = cups will use the "dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file.

    @@ -3307,17 +3343,17 @@ printable service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.

    Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the nobody account. If this happens then create - an alternative guest account that can print and set the guest account + an alternative guest account that can print and set the guest account in the [global] section.

    You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.

    print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s

    You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you normally print files on your system. The default for - the parameter varies depending on the setting of the printing + the parameter varies depending on the setting of the printing parameter.

    Default: For printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :

    print command = lpr -r -P%p %s

    For printing = SYSV or HPUX :

    print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s

    For printing = SOFTQ :

    print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s

    For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against - libcups, then printcap = cups + libcups, then printcap = cups uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc. Otherwise it maps to the System V commands with the -oraw option for printing, i.e. it @@ -3349,7 +3385,7 @@ If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified.

    - The default value of the printer name may be lp on many + The default value of the printer name may be lp on many systems.

    Default: printer name = none @@ -3416,7 +3452,7 @@

    queueresume command (S)

    This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the - previous parameter (queuepause command).

    This command should be a program or script which takes + previous parameter (queuepause command).

    This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.

    This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 @@ -3436,15 +3472,15 @@

    read list (S)

    This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list - then they will not be given write access, no matter what the read only option is set - to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the invalid users + then they will not be given write access, no matter what the read only option is set + to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the invalid users parameter. -

    This parameter will not work with the security = share in +

    This parameter will not work with the security = share in Samba 3.0. This is by design.

    Default: read list =

    Example: read list = mary, @students -

    read only (S)

    An inverted synonym is writeable.

    If this parameter is yes, then users +

    read only (S)

    An inverted synonym is writeable.

    If this parameter is yes, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory.

    Note that a printable service (printable = yes) will ALWAYS allow writing to the directory @@ -3480,7 +3516,7 @@

    the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the - workgroup name then the one given in the workgroup parameter + workgroup name then the one given in the workgroup parameter is used instead.

    The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote @@ -3517,7 +3553,7 @@ that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse master on its segment.

    - The remote browse sync may be used on networks + The remote browse sync may be used on networks where there is no WINS server, and may be used on disjoint networks where each network has its own WINS server.

    Default: remote browse sync = @@ -3579,7 +3615,7 @@ means.

    Note

    The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed - by setting guest ok = yes on any share. + by setting guest ok = yes on any share.

    Default: restrict anonymous = 0

    root

    This parameter is a synonym for root directory.

    root dir

    This parameter is a synonym for root directory.

    root directory (G)

    The server will chroot() (i.e. @@ -3589,7 +3625,7 @@ It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the - wide smbconfoptions parameter). + wide smbconfoptions parameter).

    Adding a root directory entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the @@ -3644,9 +3680,9 @@ want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult to setup guest shares with security = user, see - the map to guestparameter for details.

    It is possible to use smbd in a + the map to guestparameter for details.

    It is possible to use smbd in a hybrid mode where it is offers both user and share - level security under different NetBIOS aliases.

    The different settings will now be explained.

    SECURITY = SHARE

    When clients connect to a share level security server they + level security under different NetBIOS aliases.

    The different settings will now be explained.

    SECURITY = SHARE

    When clients connect to a share level security server they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with @@ -3659,10 +3695,10 @@ in share level security, smbd uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client.

    A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given - client password is constructed using the following methods :

    • If the guest only parameter is set, then all the other - stages are missed and only the guest account username is checked. + client password is constructed using the following methods :

      • If the guest only parameter is set, then all the other + stages are missed and only the guest account username is checked.

      • Is a username is sent with the share connection - request, then this username (after mapping - see username map), + request, then this username (after mapping - see username map), is added as a potential username.

      • If the client did a previous logon request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the @@ -3671,7 +3707,7 @@ added as a potential username.

      • The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username. -

      • Any users on the user list are added as potential usernames. +

      • Any users on the user list are added as potential usernames.

      If the guest only parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the @@ -3683,17 +3719,17 @@ be used in granting access.

      See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      SECURITY = USER

      This is the default security setting in Samba 3.0. With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a - valid username and password (which can be mapped using the username map - parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the encrypted passwords parameter) can also - be used in this security mode. Parameters such as user and guest only if set are then applied and + valid username and password (which can be mapped using the username map + parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the encrypted passwords parameter) can also + be used in this security mode. Parameters such as user and guest only if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully authenticated.

      Note that the name of the resource being requested is not sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. - See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      SECURITY = DOMAIN

      This mode will only work correctly if net(8) has been used to add this - machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the encrypted passwords + the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. + See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      SECURITY = DOMAIN

      This mode will only work correctly if net(8) has been used to add this + machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the encrypted passwords parameter to be set to yes. In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly @@ -3707,13 +3743,13 @@ requested is not sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. - See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section - NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      See also the password server parameter and - the encrypted passwords parameter.

      SECURITY = SERVER

      + the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. + See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section + NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      See also the password server parameter and + the encrypted passwords parameter.

      SECURITY = SERVER

      In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this fails it will revert to security = user. It expects the - encrypted passwords parameter to be set to yes, unless the remote + encrypted passwords parameter to be set to yes, unless the remote server does not support them. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid smbpasswd file to check users against. See the chapter about the User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up. @@ -3733,10 +3769,10 @@ requested is not sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. - See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section - NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      See also the password server parameter and the - encrypted passwords parameter.

      SECURITY = ADS

      In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To operate + the server to automatically map unknown users into the guest account. + See the map to guest parameter for details on doing this.

      See also the section + NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.

      See also the password server parameter and the + encrypted passwords parameter.

      SECURITY = ADS

      In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the net utility.

      Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain @@ -3749,7 +3785,7 @@ UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box.

      This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not - in this mask from being modified. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with force security mode, which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND. + in this mask from being modified. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with force security mode, which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND.

      Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change.

      @@ -3764,7 +3800,7 @@

    server schannel (G)

    This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. - server schannel = no does not offer the schannel, server schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and server schannel = yes denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. + server schannel = no does not offer the schannel, server schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and server schannel = yes denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4.

    Please note that with this set to no you will have to apply the WindowsXP @@ -3838,8 +3874,8 @@

    short preserve case (S)

    This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced - to be the default case - . This option can be use with preserve case = yes + to be the default case + . This option can be use with preserve case = yes to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered.

    See the section on NAME MANGLING.

    Default: short preserve case = yes @@ -3939,10 +3975,10 @@

    store dos attributes (S)

    If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such - as occurs with map hidden and map readonly). When set, DOS + as occurs with map hidden and map readonly). When set, DOS attributes will be stored onto an extended attribute in the UNIX filesystem, associated with the file or - directory. For no other mapping to occur as a fall-back, the parameters map hidden, - map system, map archive and map readonly must be set to off. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended + directory. For no other mapping to occur as a fall-back, the parameters map hidden, + map system, map archive and map readonly must be set to off. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended attribute named "user.DOSATTRIB". This extended attribute is explicitly hidden from smbd clients requesting an EA list. On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel. @@ -3961,15 +3997,20 @@ of users.

    Default: strict allocate = no

    strict locking (S)

    - This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to yes, + This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to yes, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.

    + When strict locking is set to Auto (the default), the server performs file lock checks only on non-oplocked files. + As most Windows redirectors perform file locking checks locally on oplocked files this is a good trade off for + inproved performance. +

    When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.

    Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important. So in the vast majority of cases, + strict locking = Auto or strict locking = no is acceptable. -

    Default: strict locking = yes +

    Default: strict locking = Auto

    strict sync (S)

    Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing @@ -4079,8 +4120,8 @@ passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd file this parameter should be set to no.

    - In order for this parameter to be operative the encrypt passwords parameter must - be set to no. The default value of encrypt passwords = Yes. Note: This must be set to no for this update encrypted to work. + In order for this parameter to be operative the encrypt passwords parameter must + be set to no. The default value of encrypt passwords = Yes. Note: This must be set to no for this update encrypted to work.

    Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to smbd must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) @@ -4152,7 +4193,7 @@ they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.

    To restrict a service to a particular set of users you - can use the valid users parameter.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name + can use the valid users parameter.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users @@ -4242,7 +4283,7 @@ Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and fred is remapped to mary then you will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to supply a password suitable for mary not - fred. The only exception to this is the username passed to the password server (if you have one). The password server will receive whatever username the client + fred. The only exception to this is the username passed to the password server (if you have one). The password server will receive whatever username the client supplies without modification.

    Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is with printing. Users who have been @@ -4270,7 +4311,7 @@ # no username map

    username map script (G)

    This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the - username map parameter. This parameter + username map parameter. This parameter specifies and external program or script that must accept a single command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication request) and return a line line on standard output (the name to which @@ -4280,6 +4321,95 @@

    Example: username map script = /etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh +

    usershare allow guests (G)

    This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed + to be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent + of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting + guest ok = yes in a share + definition. Due to the security sensitive nature of this the default + is set to off.

    Default: usershare allow guests = no + +

    usershare max shares (G)

    This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares + that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the + usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored. +

    Default: usershare max shares = 0 + +

    usershare owner only (G)

    This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by + a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the + user defined share or not. If set to True (the default) then + smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by + the user who owns the usershare file defining this share and + refuses to create the share if not. If set to False then no + such check is performed and any directory path may be exported + regardless of who owns it. +

    Default: usershare owner only = True + +

    usershare path (G)

    This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the + filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files. + This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for + other, and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the + "sticky" bit must also be set, restricting rename and delete to + owners of a file (in the same way the /tmp directory is usually configured). + Members of the group owner of this directory are the users allowed to create + usershares. If this parameter is undefined then no user defined + shares are allowed. +

    + For example, a valid usershare directory might be /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares, + set up as follows. +

    +

    +	ls -ld /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
    +	drwxrwx--T  2 root power_users 4096 2006-05-05 12:27 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
    +	

    +

    + In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares. +

    Default: usershare path = NULL + +

    usershare prefix allow list (G)

    This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames + the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. + If the pathname exported doesn't start with one of the strings in this + list the user defined share will not be allowed. This allows the Samba + administrator to restrict the directories on the system that can be + exported by user defined shares. +

    + If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a + "usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed + first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most + restrictive interpretation. +

    Default: usershare prefix allow list = NULL + +

    Example: usershare prefix allow list = /home /data /space + +

    usershare prefix deny list (G)

    This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames + the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. + If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this + list the user defined share will not be allowed. Any pathname not + starting with one of these strings will be allowed to be exported + as a usershare. This allows the Samba administrator to restrict the + directories on the system that can be exported by user defined shares. +

    + If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a + "usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed + first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most + restrictive interpretation. +

    Default: usershare prefix deny list = NULL + +

    Example: usershare prefix deny list = /etc /dev /private + +

    usershare template share (G)

    User defined shares only have limited possible parameters + such as path, guest ok etc. This parameter allows usershares to + "cloned" from an existing share. If "usershare template share" + is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares + created have their defaults set from the parameters set on this + share. +

    + The target share may be set to be invalid for real file + sharing by setting the parameter "-valid = False" on the template + share definition. This causes it not to be seen as a real exported + share but to be able to be used as a template for usershares. +

    Default: usershare template share = NULL + +

    Example: usershare template share = template_share +

    use sendfile (S)

    If this parameter is yes, and the sendfile() system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that @@ -4354,11 +4484,11 @@ Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the unix directory separator '/'.

    - Note that the case sensitive option is applicable in vetoing files. + Note that the case sensitive option is applicable in vetoing files.

    One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this - deletion will fail unless you also set the delete veto files + deletion will fail unless you also set the delete veto files parameter to yes.

    Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files @@ -4378,11 +4508,11 @@

    Default: veto files = No files or directories are vetoed.

    veto oplock files (S)

    - This parameter is only valid when the oplocks + This parameter is only valid when the oplocks parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the - veto files parameter. + veto files parameter.

    You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark @@ -4430,7 +4560,7 @@ endgrent() group of system calls. If the winbind enum groups parameter is no, calls to the getgrent() system - call will not return any data.

    Warning

    Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.

    Default: winbind enum groups = yes + call will not return any data.

    Warning

    Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.

    Default: winbind enum groups = no

    winbind enum users (G)

    On large installations using winbindd(8) it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the setpwent(), @@ -4442,7 +4572,7 @@ enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. For example, the finger program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching - usernames.

    Default: winbind enum users = yes + usernames.

    Default: winbind enum users = no

    winbind nested groups (G)

    If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or @@ -4450,8 +4580,7 @@ groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared between DC's through their SAM) and can contain users and global groups from any trusted SAM. To be able to use nested - groups, you need to run nss_winbind.

    Please note that per 3.0.3 this is a new feature, so - handle with care.

    Default: winbind nested groups = no + groups, you need to run nss_winbind.

    Default: winbind nested groups = yes

    winbind nss info (G)

    This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name Service Information to construct a user's home directory and login shell. @@ -4473,6 +4602,21 @@

    Example: winbind nss info = template sfu +

    winbind offline logon (G)

    This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should + allow to login with the pam_winbind + module using Cached Credentials. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials + from successful logins encrypted in a local cache. +

    Default: winbind offline logon = false + +

    Example: winbind offline logon = true + +

    winbind refresh tickets (G)

    This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets + retrieved using the pam_winbind module. + +

    Default: winbind refresh tickets = false + +

    Example: winbind refresh tickets = true +

    winbind separator (G)

    This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of DOMAIN \user. This parameter @@ -4554,12 +4698,12 @@

    workgroup (G)

    This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with - the security = domain + the security = domain setting.

    Default: workgroup = WORKGROUP

    Example: workgroup = MYGROUP -

    writable

    This parameter is a synonym for writeable.

    writeable (S)

    Inverted synonym for read only.

    No default

    write cache size (S)

    If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, +

    writable

    This parameter is a synonym for writeable.

    writeable (S)

    Inverted synonym for read only.

    No default

    write cache size (S)

    If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does not do this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request @@ -4580,14 +4724,14 @@

    write list (S)

    This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter - what the read only option is set to. The list can + what the read only option is set to. The list can include group names using the @group syntax.

    Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be given write access.

    By design, this parameter will not work with the - security = share in Samba 3.0. + security = share in Samba 3.0.

    Default: write list =

    Example: write list = admin, root, @staff @@ -4608,7 +4752,7 @@

    Example: wtmp directory = /var/log/wtmp -

    WARNINGS

    +

    WARNINGS

    Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility.

    @@ -4621,8 +4765,8 @@ for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:27.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:56.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -smbcontrol

    Name

    smbcontrol — send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes

    Synopsis

    smbcontrol [-i] [-s]

    smbcontrol [destination] [message-type] [parameter]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbcontrol is a very small program, which - sends messages to a smbd(8), a nmbd(8), or a winbindd(8) daemon running on the system.

    OPTIONS

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. +smbcontrol

    Name

    smbcontrol — send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes

    Synopsis

    smbcontrol [-i] [-s]

    smbcontrol [destination] [message-type] [parameter]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbcontrol is a very small program, which + sends messages to a smbd(8), a nmbd(8), or a winbindd(8) daemon running on the system.

    OPTIONS

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ nmbd.pid file.

    If a single process ID is given, the message is sent to only that process.

    message-type

    Type of message to send. See the section MESSAGE-TYPES for details. -

    parameters

    any parameters required for the message-type

    MESSAGE-TYPES

    Available message types are:

    close-share

    Order smbd to close the client +

    parameters

    any parameters required for the message-type

    MESSAGE-TYPES

    Available message types are:

    close-share

    Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ to update their local version of the driver. Can only be sent to smbd.

    reload-config

    Force daemon to reload smb.conf configuration file. Can be sent to smbd, nmbd, or winbindd. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    nmbd(8) and smbd(8).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    nmbd(8) and smbd(8).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:29.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html 2006-07-06 05:17:57.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smbcquotas

    Name

    smbcquotas — Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares

    Synopsis

    smbcquotas {//server/share} [-u user] [-L] [-F] [-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [-n] [-t] [-v] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-l logdir] [-V] [-U username] [-N] [-k] [-A]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbcquotas program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares.

    OPTIONS

    The following options are available to the smbcquotas program.

    -u user

    Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set. +smbcquotas

    Name

    smbcquotas — Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares

    Synopsis

    smbcquotas {//server/share} [-u user] [-L] [-F] [-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [-n] [-t] [-v] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-l logdir] [-V] [-U username] [-N] [-k] [-A]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbcquotas program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares.

    OPTIONS

    The following options are available to the smbcquotas program.

    -u user

    Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set. By default the current user's username will be used.

    -L

    Lists all quota records of the share.

    -F

    Show the share quota status and default limits.

    -S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND

    This command sets/modifies quotas for a user or on the share, depending on the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND parameter which is described later.

    -n

    This option displays all QUOTA information in numeric format. The default is to convert SIDs to names and QUOTA limits @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the ps command. To be safe always allow rpcclient to prompt for a password and type -it in directly.

    QUOTA_SET_COMAND

    The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by +it in directly.

    QUOTA_SET_COMAND

    The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following:

    for setting user quotas for the user specified by -u or the current username:

    @@ -73,13 +73,13 @@ for changing the share quota settings:

    FSQFLAGS:QUOTA_ENABLED/DENY_DISK/LOG_SOFTLIMIT/LOG_HARD_LIMIT -

    EXIT STATUS

    The smbcquotas program sets the exit status +

    EXIT STATUS

    The smbcquotas program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values.

    If the operation succeeded, smbcquotas returns an exit status of 0. If smbcquotas couldn't connect to the specified server, or when there was an error getting or setting the quota(s), an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    smbcquotas was written by Stefan Metzmacher.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:31.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html 2006-07-06 05:17:58.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smbd

    Name

    smbd — server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients

    Synopsis

    smbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number(s)>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbd is the server daemon that +smbd

    Name

    smbd — server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients

    Synopsis

    smbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number(s)>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbd is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol. This is compatible @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established. Either the user will have to - disconnect from the service, or smbd killed and restarted.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes + disconnect from the service, or smbd killed and restarted.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. Operating the server as a @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -76,9 +76,9 @@

    -b

    Prints information about how Samba was built.

    -p <port number(s)>

    port number(s) is a space or comma-separated list of TCP ports smbd should listen on. - The default value is taken from the ports parameter in smb.conf

    The default ports are 139 (used for SMB over NetBIOS over TCP) + The default value is taken from the ports parameter in smb.conf

    The default ports are 139 (used for SMB over NetBIOS over TCP) and port 445 (used for plain SMB over TCP). -

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the +

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the inetd meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. @@ -92,20 +92,20 @@

    /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf

    This is the default location of the smb.conf(5) server configuration file. Other common places that systems install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf and /etc/samba/smb.conf.

    This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients. See smb.conf(5) for more information.

    LIMITATIONS

    On some systems smbd cannot change uid back + is to make available to clients. See smb.conf(5) for more information.

    LIMITATIONS

    On some systems smbd cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or - similar.

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    PRINTER

    If no printer name is specified to + similar.

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    PRINTER

    If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of this variable (or lp if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use. This - is not specific to the server, however.

    PAM INTERACTION

    Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext + is not specific to the server, however.

    PAM INTERACTION

    Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted - by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the obey pam restrictions smb.conf(5) paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: + by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the obey pam restrictions smb.conf(5) paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply:

    • Account Validation: All accesses to a samba server are checked against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to @@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ is granted. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty. Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line added for session support. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line.

    The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the server. If you have problems, set @@ -125,10 +125,10 @@ available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the - diagnostics you are seeing.

    TDB FILES

    Samba stores it's data in several TDB (Trivial Database) files, usually located in /var/lib/samba.

    + diagnostics you are seeing.

    TDB FILES

    Samba stores it's data in several TDB (Trivial Database) files, usually located in /var/lib/samba.

    (*) information persistent across restarts (but not necessarily important to backup). -

    account_policy.tdb*

    NT account policy settings such as pw expiration, etc...

    brlock.tdb

    byte range locks

    browse.dat

    browse lists

    connections.tdb

    share connections (used to enforce max connections, etc...)

    gencache.tdb

    generic caching db

    group_mapping.tdb*

    group mapping information

    locking.tdb

    share modes & oplocks

    login_cache.tdb*

    bad pw attempts

    messages.tdb

    Samba messaging system

    netsamlogon_cache.tdb*

    cache of user net_info_3 struct from net_samlogon() request (as a domain member)

    ntdrivers.tdb*

    installed printer drivers

    ntforms.tdb*

    installed printer forms

    ntprinters.tdb*

    installed printer information

    printing/

    directory containing tdb per print queue of cached lpq output

    registry.tdb

    Windows registry skeleton (connect via regedit.exe)

    sessionid.tdb

    session information (e.g. support for 'utmp = yes')

    share_info.tdb*

    share acls

    winbindd_cache.tdb

    winbindd's cache of user lists, etc...

    winbindd_idmap.tdb*

    winbindd's local idmap db

    wins.dat*

    wins database when 'wins support = yes'

    SIGNALS

    Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to +

    account_policy.tdb*

    NT account policy settings such as pw expiration, etc...

    brlock.tdb

    byte range locks

    browse.dat

    browse lists

    connections.tdb

    share connections (used to enforce max connections, etc...)

    gencache.tdb

    generic caching db

    group_mapping.tdb*

    group mapping information

    locking.tdb

    share modes & oplocks

    login_cache.tdb*

    bad pw attempts

    messages.tdb

    Samba messaging system

    netsamlogon_cache.tdb*

    cache of user net_info_3 struct from net_samlogon() request (as a domain member)

    ntdrivers.tdb*

    installed printer drivers

    ntforms.tdb*

    installed printer forms

    ntprinters.tdb*

    installed printer information

    printing/

    directory containing tdb per print queue of cached lpq output

    registry.tdb

    Windows registry skeleton (connect via regedit.exe)

    sessionid.tdb

    session information (e.g. support for 'utmp = yes')

    share_info.tdb*

    share acls

    winbindd_cache.tdb

    winbindd's cache of user lists, etc...

    winbindd_idmap.tdb*

    winbindd's local idmap db

    wins.dat*

    wins database when 'wins support = yes'

    SIGNALS

    Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to reload its smb.conf configuration file within a short period of time.

    To shut down a user's smbd process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9) NOT @@ -143,11 +143,11 @@ smbd is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking - them after, however this would affect performance.

    SEE ALSO

    hosts_access(5), inetd(8), nmbd(8), smb.conf(5), smbclient(1), testparm(1), testprns(1), and the + them after, however this would affect performance.

    SEE ALSO

    hosts_access(5), inetd(8), nmbd(8), smb.conf(5), smbclient(1), testparm(1), testprns(1), and the Internet RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page - http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:35.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:00.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ -smbget

    Name

    smbget — wget-like utility for download files over SMB

    Synopsis

    smbget [-a, --guest] [-r, --resume] [-R, --recursive] [-u, --username=STRING] [-p, --password=STRING] [-w, --workgroup=STRING] [-n, --nonprompt] [-d, --debuglevel=INT] [-D, --dots] [-P, --keep-permissions] [-o, --outputfile] [-f, --rcfile] [-q, --quiet] [-v, --verbose] [-b, --blocksize] [-?, --help] [--usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [...]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbget is a simple utility with wget-like semantics, that can download files from SMB servers. You can specify the files you would like to download on the command-line. +smbget

    Name

    smbget — wget-like utility for download files over SMB

    Synopsis

    smbget [-a, --guest] [-r, --resume] [-R, --recursive] [-u, --username=STRING] [-p, --password=STRING] [-w, --workgroup=STRING] [-n, --nonprompt] [-d, --debuglevel=INT] [-D, --dots] [-P, --keep-permissions] [-o, --outputfile] [-f, --rcfile] [-q, --quiet] [-v, --verbose] [-b, --blocksize] [-?, --help] [--usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [...]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbget is a simple utility with wget-like semantics, that can download files from SMB servers. You can specify the files you would like to download on the command-line.

    The files should be in the smb-URL standard, e.g. use smb://host/share/file for the UNC path \\\\HOST\\SHARE\\file. -

    OPTIONS

    -a, --guest

    Work as user guest

    -r, --resume

    Automatically resume aborted files

    -R, --recursive

    Recursively download files

    -u, --username=STRING

    Username to use

    -p, --password=STRING

    Password to use

    -w, --workgroup=STRING

    Workgroup to use (optional)

    -n, --nonprompt

    Don't ask anything (non-interactive)

    -d, --debuglevel=INT

    Debuglevel to use

    -D, --dots

    Show dots as progress indication

    -P, --keep-permissions

    Set same permissions on local file as are set on remote file.

    -o, --outputfile

    Write the file that is being download to the specified file. Can not be used together with -R.

    -f, --rcfile

    Use specified rcfile. This will be loaded in the order it was specified - e.g. if you specify any options before this one, they might get overriden by the contents of the rcfile.

    -q, --quiet

    Be quiet

    -v, --verbose

    Be verbose

    -b, --blocksize

    Number of bytes to download in a block. Defaults to 64000.

    -?, --help

    Show help message

    --usage

    Display brief usage message

    SMB URLS

    SMB URL's should be specified in the following format:

    +	

    OPTIONS

    -a, --guest

    Work as user guest

    -r, --resume

    Automatically resume aborted files

    -R, --recursive

    Recursively download files

    -u, --username=STRING

    Username to use

    -p, --password=STRING

    Password to use

    -w, --workgroup=STRING

    Workgroup to use (optional)

    -n, --nonprompt

    Don't ask anything (non-interactive)

    -d, --debuglevel=INT

    Debuglevel to use

    -D, --dots

    Show dots as progress indication

    -P, --keep-permissions

    Set same permissions on local file as are set on remote file.

    -o, --outputfile

    Write the file that is being download to the specified file. Can not be used together with -R.

    -f, --rcfile

    Use specified rcfile. This will be loaded in the order it was specified - e.g. if you specify any options before this one, they might get overriden by the contents of the rcfile.

    -q, --quiet

    Be quiet

    -v, --verbose

    Be verbose

    -b, --blocksize

    Number of bytes to download in a block. Defaults to 64000.

    -?, --help

    Show help message

    --usage

    Display brief usage message

    SMB URLS

    SMB URL's should be specified in the following format:

     smb://[[[domain;]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]]
     
     smb:// means all the workgroups
     
     smb://name/ means, if name is a workgroup, all the servers in this workgroup, or if name is a server, all the shares on this server.
    -

    EXAMPLES

    +

    EXAMPLES

     # Recursively download 'src' directory
     smbget -R smb://rhonwyn/jelmer/src
     # Download FreeBSD ISO and enable resuming
    @@ -17,10 +17,10 @@
     smbget -Rr smb://rhonwyn/isos
     # Backup my data on rhonwyn
     smbget -Rr smb://rhonwyn/
    -

    BUGS

    Permission denied is returned in some cases where the cause of the error is unknown +

    BUGS

    Permission denied is returned in some cases where the cause of the error is unknown (such as an illegally formatted smb:// url or trying to get a directory without -R -turned on).

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +turned on).

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The smbget manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html 2006-01-29 10:16:37.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html 2006-07-06 05:18:01.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -smbgetrc

    Name

    smbgetrc — configuration file for smbget

    Synopsis

    smbgetrc

    DESCRIPTION

    +smbgetrc

    Name

    smbgetrc — configuration file for smbget

    Synopsis

    smbgetrc

    DESCRIPTION

    This manual page documents the format and options of the smbgetrc file. This is the configuration file used by the smbget(1) utility. The file contains of key-value pairs, one pair on each line. The key and value should be separated by a space.

    By default, smbget reads its configuration from $HOME/.smbgetrc, though - other locations can be specified using the command-line options.

    OPTIONS

    + other locations can be specified using the command-line options.

    OPTIONS

    The following keys can be set:

    resume on|off

    Whether aborted downloads should be automatically resumed.

    recursive on|off

    Whether directories should be downloaded recursively

    username name

    Username to use when logging in to the remote server. Use an empty string for anonymous access. -

    password pass

    Password to use when logging in.

    workgroup wg

    Workgroup to use when logging in

    nonprompt on|off

    Turns off asking for username and password. Useful for scripts.

    debuglevel int

    (Samba) debuglevel to run at. Useful for tracking down protocol level problems.

    dots on|off

    Whether a single dot should be printed for each block that has been downloaded, instead of the default progress indicator.

    blocksize int

    Number of bytes to put in a block.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbget(1) and Samba(7). -

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    password pass

    Password to use when logging in.

    workgroup wg

    Workgroup to use when logging in

    nonprompt on|off

    Turns off asking for username and password. Useful for scripts.

    debuglevel int

    (Samba) debuglevel to run at. Useful for tracking down protocol level problems.

    dots on|off

    Whether a single dot should be printed for each block that has been downloaded, instead of the default progress indicator.

    blocksize int

    Number of bytes to put in a block.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbget(1) and Samba(7). +

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    This manual page was written by Jelmer Vernooij

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmnt.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmnt.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmnt.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:39.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmnt.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:02.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -smbmnt

    Name

    smbmnt — helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems

    Synopsis

    smbmnt {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmnt is a helper application used +smbmnt

    Name

    smbmnt — helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems

    Synopsis

    smbmnt {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmnt is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares. smbmnt can be installed setuid root if you want normal users to be able to mount their SMB shares.

    A setuid smbmnt will only allow mounts on directories owned by the user, and that the user has write permission on.

    The smbmnt program is normally invoked by smbmount(8). It should not be invoked directly by users.

    smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt. You must ensure - that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used.

    OPTIONS

    -r

    mount the filesystem read-only + that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used.

    OPTIONS

    -r

    mount the filesystem read-only

    -u uid

    specify the uid that the files will be owned by

    -g gid

    specify the gid that the files will be owned by

    -f mask

    specify the octal file mask applied @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this command is run on a 2.4 or higher Linux kernel.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield +

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield and others.

    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools smbmount, smbumount, and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmount.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmount.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmount.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:42.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbmount.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:03.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smbmount

    Name

    smbmount — mount an smbfs filesystem

    Synopsis

    smbmount {service} {mount-point} [-o options]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmount mounts a Linux SMB filesystem. It +smbmount

    Name

    smbmount — mount an smbfs filesystem

    Synopsis

    smbmount {service} {mount-point} [-o options]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmount mounts a Linux SMB filesystem. It is usually invoked as mount.smbfs by the mount(8) command when using the "-t smbfs" option. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ smbmount process may also be called mount.smbfs.

    Note

    smbmount calls smbmnt(8) to do the actual mount. You must make sure that smbmnt is in the path so - that it can be found.

    OPTIONS

    username=<arg>

    + that it can be found.

    OPTIONS

    username=<arg>

    specifies the username to connect as. If this is not given, then the environment variable USER is used. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup to be specified as part of the username. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ like 10000ms (10 seconds) is probably more reasonable in many cases. (Note: only kernel 2.4.2 or later) -

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The variable USER may contain the username of the +

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The variable USER may contain the username of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords. The variable can be used to set both username and @@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords.

    The variable PASSWD_FILE may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is - read and used as the password.

    OTHER COMMANDS

    + read and used as the password.

    OTHER COMMANDS

    File systems that have been mounted using the smbmount can be unmounted using the smbumount or the UNIX system umount command. -

    BUGS

    Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled. +

    BUGS

    Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled. For passwords an alternative way of passing them is in a credentials file or in the PASSWD environment.

    The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space.

    One smbfs bug is important enough to mention here, even if it @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ trigger this bug are known.

    Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software - when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)

    SEE ALSO

    Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt in the linux kernel + when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)

    SEE ALSO

    Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information.

    FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount

    For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at smbsh(1) or at other solutions, such as - Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server.

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield + Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server.

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield and others.

    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools smbmount, smbumount, and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html 2006-01-29 10:16:45.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html 2006-07-06 05:18:04.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -smbpasswd

    Name

    smbpasswd — The Samba encrypted password file

    Synopsis

    smbpasswd

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains +smbpasswd

    Name

    smbpasswd — The Samba encrypted password file

    Synopsis

    smbpasswd

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the user, as well as account flag information and the time the password was last changed. This file format has been evolving with - Samba and has had several different formats in the past.

    FILE FORMAT

    The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 + Samba and has had several different formats in the past.

    FILE FORMAT

    The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 is very similar to the familiar Unix passwd(5) file. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon. Any entry @@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ last modified. It consists of the characters 'LCT-' (standing for "Last Change Time") followed by a numeric encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change was made. -

    All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbpasswd(8), Samba(7), and +

    All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbpasswd(8), Samba(7), and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm. -

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:48.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:05.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smbpasswd

    Name

    smbpasswd — change a user's SMB password

    Synopsis

    smbpasswd [-a] [-c <config file>] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-i] [-L] [username]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbpasswd program has several different +smbpasswd

    Name

    smbpasswd — change a user's SMB password

    Synopsis

    smbpasswd [-a] [-c <config file>] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-W] [-i] [-L] [username]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The smbpasswd program has several different functions, depending on whether it is run by the root user or not. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ the attributes of the user in this file to be made. When run by root, smbpasswd accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not - running.

    OPTIONS

    -a

    + running.

    OPTIONS

    -a

    This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password). This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command. Note that the @@ -128,11 +128,21 @@ is to aid people writing scripts to drive smbpasswd

    -w password

    This parameter is only available if Samba has been compiled with LDAP support. The -w switch is used to specify the password to be used with the - ldap admin dn. Note that the password is stored in + ldap admin dn. Note that the password is stored in the secrets.tdb and is keyed off of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of ldap admin dn ever changes, the password will need to be manually updated as well. +

    -W

    NOTE: This option is same as "-w" + except that the password should be entered using stdin. +

    This parameter is only available if Samba + has been compiled with LDAP support. The -W + switch is used to specify the password to be used with the + ldap admin dn. Note that the password is stored in + the secrets.tdb and is keyed off + of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of ldap + admin dn ever changes, the password will need to be + manually updated as well.

    -i

    This option tells smbpasswd that the account being changed is an interdomain trust account. Currently this is used when Samba is being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller. @@ -141,7 +151,7 @@ root only options to operate on. Only root can specify this parameter as only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly in the local smbpasswd file. -

    NOTES

    Since smbpasswd works in client-server +

    NOTES

    Since smbpasswd works in client-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the @@ -149,7 +159,7 @@ hosts or deny hosts entry in the smb.conf(5) file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd.

    In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba - has been set up to use encrypted passwords.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + has been set up to use encrypted passwords.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbsh.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbsh.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbsh.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:50.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbsh.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:06.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ smbsh

    Name

    smbsh — Allows access to remote SMB shares - using UNIX commands

    Synopsis

    smbsh [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R <name resolve order>] [-d <debug level>] [-l logdir] [-L libdir]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbsh allows you to access an NT filesystem + using UNIX commands

    Synopsis

    smbsh [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R <name resolve order>] [-d <debug level>] [-l logdir] [-L libdir]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbsh allows you to access an NT filesystem using UNIX commands such as ls, egrep, and rcp. You must use a shell that is dynamically linked in order for smbsh - to work correctly.

    OPTIONS

    -W WORKGROUP

    Override the default workgroup specified in the + to work correctly.

    OPTIONS

    -W WORKGROUP

    Override the default workgroup specified in the workgroup parameter of the smb.conf(5) file for this session. This may be needed to connect to some servers.

    -U username[%pass]

    Sets the SMB username or username and password. @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -R <name resolve order>

    This option is used to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ being on a locally connected subnet.

    If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the smb.conf file parameter -() will be used. +() will be used.

    The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without -this parameter or any entry in the parameter of the smb.conf file, the name +this parameter or any entry in the parameter of the smb.conf file, the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order.

    -L libdir

    This parameter specifies the location of the shared libraries used by smbsh. The default value is specified at compile time. -

    EXAMPLES

    To use the smbsh command, execute +

    EXAMPLES

    To use the smbsh command, execute smbsh from the prompt and enter the username and password that authenticates you to the machine running the Windows NT operating system. @@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ ls /smb/MYGROUP/<machine-name> will show the share names for that machine. You could then, for example, use the cd command to change directories, vi to - edit files, and rcp to copy files.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    BUGS

    smbsh works by intercepting the standard + edit files, and rcp to copy files.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    BUGS

    smbsh works by intercepting the standard libc calls with the dynamically loaded versions in smbwrapper.o. Not all calls have been "wrapped", so some programs may not function correctly under smbsh .

    Programs which are not dynamically linked cannot make use of smbsh's functionality. Most versions of UNIX have a file command that will - describe how a program was linked.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + describe how a program was linked.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html 2006-01-29 10:16:53.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:07.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -smbspool

    Name

    smbspool — send a print file to an SMB printer

    Synopsis

    smbspool {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbspool is a very small print spooling program that +smbspool

    Name

    smbspool — send a print file to an SMB printer

    Synopsis

    smbspool {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbspool is a very small print spooling program that sends a print file to an SMB printer. The command-line arguments are position-dependent for compatibility with the Common UNIX Printing System, but you can use smbspool with any printing system @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ or argv[1] if that is not the case.

    Programs using the exec(2) functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the DEVICE_URI environment variable prior to - running smbspool.

    OPTIONS

    • The job argument (argv[1]) contains the + running smbspool.

    OPTIONS

    • The job argument (argv[1]) contains the job ID number and is presently not used by smbspool.

    • The user argument (argv[2]) contains the print user's name and is presently not used by smbspool. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ the print options in a single string and is currently not used by smbspool.

    • The filename argument (argv[6]) contains the name of the file to print. If this argument is not specified - then the print file is read from the standard input.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbd(8) and samba(7).

    AUTHOR

    smbspool was written by Michael Sweet + then the print file is read from the standard input.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbd(8) and samba(7).

    AUTHOR

    smbspool was written by Michael Sweet at Easy Software Products.

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:55.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:08.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -smbstatus

    Name

    smbstatus — report on current Samba connections

    Synopsis

    smbstatus [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbstatus is a very simple program to - list the current Samba connections.

    OPTIONS

    -P|--profile

    If samba has been compiled with the +smbstatus

    Name

    smbstatus — report on current Samba connections

    Synopsis

    smbstatus [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbstatus is a very simple program to + list the current Samba connections.

    OPTIONS

    -P|--profile

    If samba has been compiled with the profiling option, print only the contents of the profiling shared memory area.

    -b|--brief

    gives brief output.

    -V

    Prints the program version number.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the @@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client.

    -v|--verbose

    gives verbose output.

    -L|--locks

    causes smbstatus to only list locks.

    -B|--byterange

    causes smbstatus to include byte range locks.

    -p|--processes

    print a list of smbd(8) processes and exit. Useful for scripting.

    -S|--shares

    causes smbstatus to only list shares.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -u|--user=<username>

    selects information relevant to username only.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbd(8) and smb.conf(5).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    -u|--user=<username>

    selects information relevant to username only.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbd(8) and smb.conf(5).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:57.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:09.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ smbtar

    Name

    smbtar — shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares - directly to UNIX tape drives

    Synopsis

    smbtar [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbtar is a very small shell script on top - of smbclient(1) which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.

    OPTIONS

    -s server

    The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides + directly to UNIX tape drives

    Synopsis

    smbtar [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbtar is a very small shell script on top + of smbclient(1) which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.

    OPTIONS

    -s server

    The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides upon.

    -x service

    The share name on the server to connect to. The default is "backup".

    -X

    Exclude mode. Exclude filenames... from tar create or restore.

    -d directory

    Change to initial directory @@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ up if they have the archive bit set. The archive bit is reset after each file is read.

    -r

    Restore. Files are restored to the share from the tar file.

    -l log level

    Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the - -d flag of smbclient(1).

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The $TAPE variable specifies the + -d flag of smbclient(1).

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The $TAPE variable specifies the default tape device to write to. May be overridden - with the -t option.

    BUGS

    The smbtar script has different - options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command.

    CAVEATS

    Sites that are more careful about security may not like + with the -t option.

    BUGS

    The smbtar script has different + options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command.

    CAVEATS

    Sites that are more careful about security may not like the way the script handles PC passwords. Backup and restore work on entire shares; should work on file lists. smbtar works best - with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    See the DIAGNOSTICS section for the smbclient(1) command.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    See the DIAGNOSTICS section for the smbclient(1) command.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    Ricky Poulten diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html 2006-01-29 10:16:59.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:10.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ smbtree

    Name

    smbtree — A text based smb network browser -

    Synopsis

    smbtree [-b] [-D] [-S]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbtree is a smb browser program +

    Synopsis

    smbtree [-b] [-D] [-S]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    smbtree is a smb browser program in text mode. It is similar to the "Network Neighborhood" found on Windows computers. It prints a tree with all the known domains, the servers in those domains and the shares on the servers. -

    OPTIONS

    -b

    Query network nodes by sending requests +

    OPTIONS

    -b

    Query network nodes by sending requests as broadcasts instead of querying the local master browser.

    -D

    Only print a list of all the domains known on broadcast or by the @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ via the ps command. To be safe always allow rpcclient to prompt for a password and type it in directly.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The smbtree man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbumount.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbumount.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbumount.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:02.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbumount.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:12.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -smbumount

    Name

    smbumount — smbfs umount for normal users

    Synopsis

    smbumount {mount-point}

    DESCRIPTION

    With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, +smbumount

    Name

    smbumount — smbfs umount for normal users

    Synopsis

    smbumount {mount-point}

    DESCRIPTION

    With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, provided that it is suid root. smbumount has been written to give normal Linux users more control over their resources. It is safe to install this program suid root, because only the user who has mounted a filesystem is allowed to unmount it again. For root it is not necessary to use smbumount. The normal umount - program works perfectly well.

    OPTIONS

    mount-point

    The directory to unmount.

    SEE ALSO

    smbmount(8)

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield + program works perfectly well.

    OPTIONS

    mount-point

    The directory to unmount.

    SEE ALSO

    smbmount(8)

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield and others.

    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools smbmount, smbumount, and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:04.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:13.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -swat

    Name

    swat — Samba Web Administration Tool

    Synopsis

    swat [-s <smb config file>] [-a] [-P]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    swat allows a Samba administrator to +swat

    Name

    swat — Samba Web Administration Tool

    Synopsis

    swat [-s <smb config file>] [-a] [-P]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    swat allows a Samba administrator to configure the complex smb.conf(5) file via a Web browser. In addition, a swat configuration page has help links to all the configurable options in the smb.conf file allowing an - administrator to easily look up the effects of any change.

    swat is run from inetd

    OPTIONS

    -s smb configuration file

    The default configuration file path is + administrator to easily look up the effects of any change.

    swat is run from inetd

    OPTIONS

    -s smb configuration file

    The default configuration file path is determined at compile time. The file specified contains the configuration details required by the smbd(8) server. This is the file that swat will modify. @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    INSTALLATION

    Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The +

    INSTALLATION

    Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The package manager in this case takes care of the installation and configuration. This section is only for those who have compiled swat from scratch.

    After you compile SWAT you need to run make install to install the swat binary and the various help files and images. A default install would put - these in:

    • /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat

    • /usr/local/samba/swat/images/*

    • /usr/local/samba/swat/help/*

    Inetd Installation

    You need to edit your /etc/inetd.conf + these in:

    • /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat

    • /usr/local/samba/swat/images/*

    • /usr/local/samba/swat/help/*

    Inetd Installation

    You need to edit your /etc/inetd.conf and /etc/services to enable SWAT to be launched via inetd.

    In /etc/services you need to add a line like this:

    swat 901/tcp

    Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the @@ -62,21 +62,21 @@ /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat swat

    Once you have edited /etc/services and /etc/inetd.conf you need to send a HUP signal to inetd. To do this use kill -1 PID - where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon.

    LAUNCHING

    To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and + where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon.

    LAUNCHING

    To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and point it at "http://localhost:901/".

    Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent - in the clear over the wire.

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    This file must contain suitable startup + in the clear over the wire.

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    This file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon.

    /etc/services

    This file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., swat) to service port (e.g., 901) and protocol type (e.g., tcp).

    /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf

    This is the default location of the smb.conf(5) server configuration file that swat edits. Other common places that systems install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf and /etc/smb.conf . This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients.

    WARNINGS

    swat will rewrite your smb.conf(5) file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all + is to make available to clients.

    WARNINGS

    swat will rewrite your smb.conf(5) file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all comments, include= and copy= options. If you have a carefully crafted - smb.conf then back it up or don't use swat!

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    inetd(5), smbd(8), smb.conf(5)

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + smb.conf then back it up or don't use swat!

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    inetd(5), smbd(8), smb.conf(5)

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:07.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:14.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -tdbbackup

    Name

    tdbbackup — tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba .tdb files

    Synopsis

    tdbbackup [-s suffix] [-v] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(1) suite.

    tdbbackup is a tool that may be used to backup samba .tdb +tdbbackup

    Name

    tdbbackup — tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba .tdb files

    Synopsis

    tdbbackup [-s suffix] [-v] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(1) suite.

    tdbbackup is a tool that may be used to backup samba .tdb files. This tool may also be used to verify the integrity of the .tdb files prior to samba startup or during normal operation. If it finds file damage and it finds a prior backup the backup file will be restored. -

    OPTIONS

    -h

    +

    OPTIONS

    -h

    Get help information.

    -s suffix

    The -s option allows the adminisistrator to specify a file @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@

    -v

    The -v will check the database for damages (currupt data) which if detected causes the backup to be restored. -

    COMMANDS

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    +

    COMMANDS

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    The tdbbackup utility can safely be run at any time. It was designed so that it can be used at any time to validate the integrity of tdb files, even during Samba operation. Typical usage for the command will be: @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@

  • *.tdb located in the /usr/local/samba/var directory or on some systems in the /var/cache or /var/lib/samba directories. -

  • VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:09.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:15.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -tdbdump

    Name

    tdbdump — tool for printing the contents of a TDB file

    Synopsis

    tdbdump {filename}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(1) suite.

    tdbdump is a very simple utility that 'dumps' the +tdbdump

    Name

    tdbdump — tool for printing the contents of a TDB file

    Synopsis

    tdbdump {filename}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(1) suite.

    tdbdump is a very simple utility that 'dumps' the contents of a TDB (Trivial DataBase) file to standard output in a human-readable format.

    This tool can be used when debugging problems with TDB files. It is intended for those who are somewhat familiar with Samba internals. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html 2006-01-29 10:17:11.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:16.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ testparm

    Name

    testparm — check an smb.conf configuration file for - internal correctness

    Synopsis

    testparm [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    testparm is a very simple test program + internal correctness

    Synopsis

    testparm [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    testparm is a very simple test program to check an smbd(8) configuration file for internal correctness. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that smbd @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ has access to each service.

    If testparm finds an error in the smb.conf file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling program, else it returns an exit code of 0. This allows shell scripts - to test the output from testparm.

    OPTIONS

    -s

    Without this option, testparm + to test the output from testparm.

    OPTIONS

    -s

    Without this option, testparm will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options.

    -V

    Prints the program version number. @@ -20,6 +20,15 @@ %L macro.

    -v

    If this option is specified, testparm will also output all options that were not used in smb.conf(5) and are thus set to their defaults.

    -t encoding

    Output data in specified encoding. +

    --parameter-name parametername

    + Dumps the named parameter. If no section-name is set the view + is limited by default to the global section. + + It is also possible to dump a parametrical option. Therfore + the option has to be separated by a colon from the + parametername. +

    --section-name sectionname

    + Dumps the named section.

    configfilename

    This is the name of the configuration file to check. If this parameter is not present then the default smb.conf(5) file will be checked. @@ -32,14 +41,14 @@ this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also be supplied.

    hostIP

    This is the IP address of the host specified in the previous parameter. This address must be supplied - if the hostname parameter is supplied.

    FILES

    smb.conf(5)

    This is usually the name of the configuration + if the hostname parameter is supplied.

    FILES

    smb.conf(5)

    This is usually the name of the configuration file used by smbd(8). -

    DIAGNOSTICS

    The program will issue a message saying whether the +

    DIAGNOSTICS

    The program will issue a message saying whether the configuration file loaded OK or not. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings if the file did not load. If the file was loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details - to stdout.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + to stdout.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:13.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:17.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -umount.cifs

    Name

    umount.cifs — for normal, non-root users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts

    Synopsis

    umount.cifs {mount-point} [-nVvhfle]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    umount.cifs unmounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It can be invoked +umount.cifs

    Name

    umount.cifs — for normal, non-root users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts

    Synopsis

    umount.cifs {mount-point} [-nVvhfle]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    umount.cifs unmounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It can be invoked indirectly by the umount(8) command when umount.cifs is in /sbin directory, unless you specify the "-i" option to umount. Specifying -i to umount avoids execution of umount helpers such as umount.cifs. The umount.cifs command only works in Linux, and the kernel must @@ -11,24 +11,24 @@ It is possible to set the mode for umount.cifs to setuid root (or equivalently update the /etc/permissions file) to allow non-root users to umount shares to directories for which they have write permission. The umount.cifs utility is typically not needed if unmounts need only be performed by root users, or if user mounts and unmounts -can rely on specifying explicit entries in /etc/fstab See

    fstab(5)

    OPTIONS

    --verbose

    print additional debugging information

    --no-mtab

    Do not update the mtab even if unmount completes successfully (/proc/mounts will still display the correct information)

    NOTES

    This command is normally intended to be installed setuid (since root users can already run unmount). An alternative to using umount.cifs is to add specfic entries for the user mounts that you wish a particular user or users to mount and unmount to /etc/fstab

    CONFIGURATION

    +can rely on specifying explicit entries in /etc/fstab See

    fstab(5)

    OPTIONS

    --verbose

    print additional debugging information

    --no-mtab

    Do not update the mtab even if unmount completes successfully (/proc/mounts will still display the correct information)

    NOTES

    This command is normally intended to be installed setuid (since root users can already run unmount). An alternative to using umount.cifs is to add specfic entries for the user mounts that you wish a particular user or users to mount and unmount to /etc/fstab

    CONFIGURATION

    The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem. In the directory /proc/fs/cifs are various configuration files and pseudo files which can display debug information. For more information see the kernel file fs/cifs/README. -

    BUGS

    At this time umount.cifs does not lock the mount table using the same lock as the umount utility does, so do not attempt to do multiple unmounts from different processes (and in particular unmounts of a cifs mount and another type of filesystem mount at the same time). +

    BUGS

    At this time umount.cifs does not lock the mount table using the same lock as the umount utility does, so do not attempt to do multiple unmounts from different processes (and in particular unmounts of a cifs mount and another type of filesystem mount at the same time).

    If the same mount point is mounted multiple times by cifs, umount.cifs will remove all of the matching entries from the mount table (although umount.cifs will actually only unmount the last one), rather than only removing the last matching entry in /etc/mtab. The pseudofile /proc/mounts will display correct information though, and the lack of an entry in /etc/mtab does not prevent subsequent unmounts.

    Note that the typical response to a bug report is a suggestion to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: umount.cifs (try umount.cifs -V), kernel (see /proc/version) and server type you are trying to contact. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 1.34 of - the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.12).

    SEE ALSO

    +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 1.34 of + the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.12).

    SEE ALSO

    Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt and fs/cifs/README in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information. -

    mount.cifs(8)

    AUTHOR

    Steve French

    The syntax was loosely based on the umount utility and the manpage was loosely based on that of mount.cifs.8. The man page was created by Steve French

    The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace +

    mount.cifs(8)

    AUTHOR

    Steve French

    The syntax was loosely based on the umount utility and the manpage was loosely based on that of mount.cifs.8. The man page was created by Steve French

    The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace tool umount.cifs is Steve French. The Linux CIFS Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html 2006-01-29 10:17:16.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:18.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -vfstest

    Name

    vfstest — tool for testing samba VFS modules

    Synopsis

    vfstest [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logdir] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    vfstest is a small command line +vfstest

    Name

    vfstest — tool for testing samba VFS modules

    Synopsis

    vfstest [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logdir] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    vfstest is a small command line utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules. It gives the user the ability to call the various VFS functions manually and supports cascaded VFS modules. -

    OPTIONS

    -c|--command=command

    Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands. +

    OPTIONS

    -c|--command=command

    Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands. See below for the commands that are available.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension @@ -28,14 +28,14 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -

    COMMANDS

    VFS COMMANDS

    • load <module.so> - Load specified VFS module

    • populate <char> <size> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data +

    COMMANDS

    VFS COMMANDS

    • load <module.so> - Load specified VFS module

    • populate <char> <size> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data

    • showdata [<offset> <len>] - Show data currently in data buffer -

    • connect - VFS connect()

    • disconnect - VFS disconnect()

    • disk_free - VFS disk_free()

    • opendir - VFS opendir()

    • readdir - VFS readdir()

    • mkdir - VFS mkdir()

    • rmdir - VFS rmdir()

    • closedir - VFS closedir()

    • open - VFS open()

    • close - VFS close()

    • read - VFS read()

    • write - VFS write()

    • lseek - VFS lseek()

    • rename - VFS rename()

    • fsync - VFS fsync()

    • stat - VFS stat()

    • fstat - VFS fstat()

    • lstat - VFS lstat()

    • unlink - VFS unlink()

    • chmod - VFS chmod()

    • fchmod - VFS fchmod()

    • chown - VFS chown()

    • fchown - VFS fchown()

    • chdir - VFS chdir()

    • getwd - VFS getwd()

    • utime - VFS utime()

    • ftruncate - VFS ftruncate()

    • lock - VFS lock()

    • symlink - VFS symlink()

    • readlink - VFS readlink()

    • link - VFS link()

    • mknod - VFS mknod()

    • realpath - VFS realpath()

    GENERAL COMMANDS

    • conf <smb.conf> - Load a different configuration file

    • help [<command>] - Get list of commands or info about specified command

    • debuglevel <level> - Set debug level

    • freemem - Free memory currently in use

    • exit - Exit vfstest

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

  • connect - VFS connect()

  • disconnect - VFS disconnect()

  • disk_free - VFS disk_free()

  • opendir - VFS opendir()

  • readdir - VFS readdir()

  • mkdir - VFS mkdir()

  • rmdir - VFS rmdir()

  • closedir - VFS closedir()

  • open - VFS open()

  • close - VFS close()

  • read - VFS read()

  • write - VFS write()

  • lseek - VFS lseek()

  • rename - VFS rename()

  • fsync - VFS fsync()

  • stat - VFS stat()

  • fstat - VFS fstat()

  • lstat - VFS lstat()

  • unlink - VFS unlink()

  • chmod - VFS chmod()

  • fchmod - VFS fchmod()

  • chown - VFS chown()

  • fchown - VFS fchown()

  • chdir - VFS chdir()

  • getwd - VFS getwd()

  • utime - VFS utime()

  • ftruncate - VFS ftruncate()

  • lock - VFS lock()

  • symlink - VFS symlink()

  • readlink - VFS readlink()

  • link - VFS link()

  • mknod - VFS mknod()

  • realpath - VFS realpath()

  • GENERAL COMMANDS

    • conf <smb.conf> - Load a different configuration file

    • help [<command>] - Get list of commands or info about specified command

    • debuglevel <level> - Set debug level

    • freemem - Free memory currently in use

    • exit - Exit vfstest

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The vfstest man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html 2006-01-29 10:17:18.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html 2006-07-06 05:18:19.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -wbinfo

    Name

    wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon

    Synopsis

    wbinfo [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The wbinfo program queries and returns information +wbinfo

    Name

    wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon

    Synopsis

    wbinfo [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the samba(7) suite.

    The wbinfo program queries and returns information created and used by the winbindd(8) daemon.

    The winbindd(8) daemon must be configured and running for the wbinfo program to be able - to return information.

    OPTIONS

    -a username%password

    Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd. + to return information.

    OPTIONS

    -a username%password

    Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd. This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results.

    Note

    Do not be tempted to use this functionality for authentication in third-party @@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by winbindd(8) then the operation will fail.

    -V

    Prints the program version number.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    EXIT STATUS

    The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation +

    EXIT STATUS

    The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed. If the winbindd(8) daemon is not working wbinfo will always return - failure.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + failure.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    wbinfo and winbindd diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html 2006-01-29 10:17:21.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html 2006-07-06 05:18:20.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ winbindd

    Name

    winbindd — Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names - from NT servers

    Synopsis

    winbindd [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    winbindd is a daemon that provides + from NT servers

    Synopsis

    winbindd [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the samba(7) suite.

    winbindd is a daemon that provides a number of services to the Name Service Switch capability found in most modern C libraries, to arbitary applications via PAM and ntlm_auth and to Samba itself.

    Even if winbind is not used for nsswitch, it still provides a service to smbd, ntlm_auth and the pam_winbind.so PAM module, by managing connections to domain controllers. In this configuraiton the - idmap uid and - idmap gid + idmap uid and + idmap gid parameters are not required. (This is known as `netlogon proxy only mode'.)

    The Name Service Switch allows user and system information to be obtained from different databases services such as NIS or DNS. The exact behaviour can be configured @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ resolve hostnames from /etc/hosts and then from the WINS server.

     hosts:		files wins
    -

    OPTIONS

    -F

    If specified, this parameter causes +

    OPTIONS

    -F

    If specified, this parameter causes the main winbindd process to not daemonize, i.e. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal. Child processes are still created as normal to service @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the parameter +override the parameter in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logdirectory

    Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension ".progname" will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ as a single process (the mode of operation in Samba 2.2). Winbindd's default behavior is to launch a child process that is responsible for updating expired cache entries. -

    NAME AND ID RESOLUTION

    Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned +

    NAME AND ID RESOLUTION

    Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned a security id (SID) which is globally unique when the user or group is created. To convert the Windows NT user or group into a unix user or group, a mapping between SIDs and unix user @@ -120,21 +120,21 @@ where the user and group mappings are stored by winbindd. If this file is deleted or corrupted, there is no way for winbindd to determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user - and group rids.

    See the parameter in + and group rids.

    See the parameter in smb.conf for options for sharing this - database, such as via LDAP.

    CONFIGURATION

    Configuration of the winbindd daemon + database, such as via LDAP.

    CONFIGURATION

    Configuration of the winbindd daemon is done through configuration parameters in the smb.conf(5) file. All parameters should be specified in the [global] section of smb.conf.

    • - winbind separator

    • - idmap uid

    • - idmap gid

    • - idmap backend

    • - winbind cache time

    • - winbind enum users

    • - winbind enum groups

    • - template homedir

    • - template shell

    • - winbind use default domain

    EXAMPLE SETUP

    + winbind separator

  • + idmap uid

  • + idmap gid

  • + idmap backend

  • + winbind cache time

  • + winbind enum users

  • + winbind enum groups

  • + template homedir

  • + template shell

  • + winbind use default domain

  • EXAMPLE SETUP

    To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus authentication from a domain controller use something like the following setup. This was tested on an early Red Hat Linux box. @@ -185,15 +185,15 @@ and that you can login to your unix box as a domain user, using the DOMAIN+user syntax for the username. You may wish to use the commands getent passwd and getent group - to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.

    NOTES

    The following notes are useful when configuring and + to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.

    NOTES

    The following notes are useful when configuring and running winbindd:

    nmbd(8) must be running on the local machine for winbindd to work.

    PAM is really easy to misconfigure. Make sure you know what you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files. It is possible to set up PAM such that you can no longer log into your system.

    If more than one UNIX machine is running winbindd, then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local - machine, unless a shared is configured.

    If the the Windows NT SID to UNIX user and group id mapping - file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost.

    SIGNALS

    The following signals can be used to manipulate the + machine, unless a shared is configured.

    If the the Windows NT SID to UNIX user and group id mapping + file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost.

    SIGNALS

    The following signals can be used to manipulate the winbindd daemon.

    SIGHUP

    Reload the smb.conf(5) file and apply any parameter changes to the running version of winbindd. This signal also clears any cached @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ by winbindd is also reloaded.

    SIGUSR2

    The SIGUSR2 signal will cause winbindd to write status information to the winbind log file.

    Log files are stored in the filename specified by the - log file parameter.

    FILES

    /etc/nsswitch.conf(5)

    Name service switch configuration file.

    /tmp/.winbindd/pipe

    The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with + log file parameter.

    FILES

    /etc/nsswitch.conf(5)

    Name service switch configuration file.

    /tmp/.winbindd/pipe

    The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with the winbindd program. For security reasons, the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the /tmp/.winbindd directory @@ -222,8 +222,8 @@ compiled using the --with-lockdir option. This directory is by default /usr/local/samba/var/locks .

    $LOCKDIR/winbindd_cache.tdb

    Storage for cached user and group information. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities +

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    wbinfo and winbindd were diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/2000users.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/2000users.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/2000users.html 2006-01-29 10:18:12.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/2000users.html 2006-07-06 05:19:06.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Chapter 6. A Distributed 2000-User Network

    Chapter 6. A Distributed 2000-User Network

    +Chapter 6. A Distributed 2000-User Network

    Chapter 6. A Distributed 2000-User Network

    There is something indeed mystical about things that are big. Large networks exhibit a certain magnetism and exude a sense of importance that obscures reality. You and I know that it is no more @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Samba are largely under control. So in this section you focus on the specifics of implementing LDAP changes, Samba changes, and approach and design of the solution and its deployment. -

    Introduction

    +

    Introduction

    Abmas is a miracle company. Most businesses would have collapsed under the weight of rapid expansion that this company has experienced. Samba is flexible, so there is no need to reinstall the whole operating @@ -39,19 +39,19 @@ and then do a near-live conversion. There is no need to reinstall a Samba server just to change the way your network should function.

    - + Network growth is common to all organizations. In this exercise, your preoccupation is with the mechanics of implementing Samba and LDAP so that network users on each network segment can work without impediment. -

    Assignment Tasks

    +

    Assignment Tasks

    Starting with the configuration files for the server called MASSIVE in ???, you now deal with the issues that are particular to large distributed networks. Your task is simple identify the challenges, consider the alternatives, and then design and implement a solution.

    - + Remember, you have users based in London (UK), Los Angeles, Washington. DC, and, three buildings in New York. A significant portion of your workforce have notebook computers and roam all over the @@ -72,18 +72,18 @@ You have outsourced all desktop deployment and management to DirectPointe. Your concern is server maintenance and third-level support. Build a plan and show what must be done. -

    Dissection and Discussion

    - - +

    Dissection and Discussion

    + + In ???, you implemented an LDAP server that provided the passdb backend for the Samba servers. You explored ways to accelerate Windows desktop profile handling and you took control of network performance.

    - - - - + + + + The implementation of an LDAP-based passdb backend (known as ldapsam in Samba parlance), or some form of database that can be distributed, is essential to permit the deployment of Samba @@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ support the range of account facilities demanded by modern network managers.

    - - + + The new tdbsam facility supports functionality that is similar to an ldapsam, but the lack of distributed infrastructure sorely limits the scope for its @@ -105,10 +105,10 @@ an XML-based backend, or for that matter, why not use an SQL-based backend? Is support for these tools broken? Answers to these questions require a bit of background.

    - - - - + + + + What is a directory? A directory is a collection of information regarding objects that can be accessed to rapidly find information that is relevant in a particular and @@ -116,19 +116,19 @@ generally more often searched (read) than updated. As a consequence, the information is organized to facilitate read access rather than to support transaction processing.

    - - - - + + + + The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) differs considerably from a traditional database. It has a simple search facility that uniquely makes a highly preferred mechanism for managing user identities. LDAP provides a scalable mechanism for distributing the data repository and for keeping all copies (slaves) in sync with the master repository.

    - - - + + + Samba is a flexible and powerful file and print sharing technology. It can use many external authentication sources and can be part of a total authentication and identity management @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ are Microsoft Active Directory and LDAP. Sites that specifically wish to avoid the proprietary implications of Microsoft Active Directory naturally gravitate toward OpenLDAP.

    - + In ???, you had to deal with a locally routed network. All deployment concerns focused around making users happy, and that simply means taking control over all network practices and @@ -147,12 +147,12 @@ between offices. You must take into account the way users need to access information globally. And you must make the network robust enough so that it can sustain partial breakdown without causing loss of -productivity.

    Technical Issues

    +productivity.

    Technical Issues

    There are at least three areas that need to be addressed as you approach the challenge of designing a network solution for the newly expanded business: -

    • - User needs such as mobility and data access

    • The nature of Windows networking protocols

    • Identity management infrastructure needs

    Let's look at each in turn.

    User Needs

    +

    • + User needs such as mobility and data access

    • The nature of Windows networking protocols

    • Identity management infrastructure needs

    Let's look at each in turn.

    User Needs

    The new company has three divisions. Staff for each division are spread across the company. Some staff are office-bound and some are mobile users. Mobile users travel globally. Some spend considerable periods working in other offices. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ curtail user needs. Parts of the global Internet infrastructure remain shielded off for reasons outside the scope of this discussion.

    - + Decisions must be made regarding where data is to be stored, how it will be replicated (if at all), and what the network bandwidth implications are. For example, one decision that can be made is to give each office its own master @@ -174,8 +174,8 @@ This way, they can synchronize all files that have changed since each logon to the network.

    - - + + No matter which way you look at this, the bandwidth requirements for acceptable performance are substantial even if only 10 percent of staff are global data users. A company with 3,500 employees, @@ -188,11 +188,11 @@ profile involves a transfer of over 750 KB from the profile server to and from the client.

    - + Obviously then, user needs and wide-area practicalities dictate the economic and technical aspects of your network design as well as for standard operating procedures. -

    The Nature of Windows Networking Protocols

    - +

    The Nature of Windows Networking Protocols

    + Network logons that include roaming profile handling requires from 140 KB to 2 MB. The inclusion of support for a minimal set of common desktop applications can push the size of a complete profile to over 15 MB. This has substantial implications @@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ determining the nature and style of mandatory profiles that may be enforced as part of a total service-level assurance program that might be implemented.

    - - + + One way to reduce the network bandwidth impact of user logon traffic is through folder redirection. In ???, you implemented this in the new Windows XP Professional standard @@ -210,14 +210,14 @@ also be excluded from synchronization to and from the server on logon or logout. Redirected folders are analogous to network drive connections. -

    +

    Of course, network applications should only be run off local application servers. As a general rule, even with 2 Mb/sec network bandwidth, it would not make sense at all for someone who is working out of the London office to run applications off a server that is located in New York.

    - + When network bandwidth becomes a precious commodity (that is most of the time), there is a significant demand to understand network processes and to mold the limits of acceptability around the @@ -226,15 +226,15 @@ When a Windows NT4/200x/XP Professional client user logs onto the network, several important things must happen.

    • - + The client obtains an IP address via DHCP. (DHCP is necessary so that users can roam between offices.)

    • - - + + The client must register itself with the WINS and/or DNS server.

    • - + The client must locate the closest domain controller.

    • The client must log onto a domain controller and obtain as part of @@ -256,15 +256,15 @@ name both by broadcast and Unicast registration that is directed at the WINS server.

      - - + + Given that the client is already a domain member, it then sends a directed (Unicast) request to the WINS server seeking the list of IP addresses for domain controllers (NetBIOS name type 0x1C). The WINS server replies with the information requested.

      - - - + + + The client sends two netlogon mailslot broadcast requests to the local network and to each of the IP addresses returned by the WINS server. Whichever answers this request first appears to @@ -274,9 +274,9 @@ was listed in the WINS server response to a request for the list of domain controllers.

      - - - + + + The logon process begins with negotiation of the SMB/CIFS protocols that are to be used; this is followed by an exchange of information that ultimately includes the client sending the @@ -287,10 +287,10 @@ needs. A secondary fact we need to know is, what happens when local domain controllers fail or break?

      - - - - + + + + Under most circumstances, the nearest domain controller responds to the netlogon mailslot broadcast. The exception to this norm occurs when the nearest domain controller is too busy or is out @@ -299,18 +299,18 @@ domain controllers. Since there can be only one PDC, all additional domain controllers are by definition BDCs.

      - - + + The provision of sufficient servers that are BDCs is an important design factor. The second important design factor involves how each of the BDCs obtains user authentication data. That is the subject of the next section, which involves key decisions regarding Identity Management facilities. -

    Identity Management Needs

    - - - - +

    Identity Management Needs

    + + + + Network managers recognize that in large organizations users generally need to be given resource access based on needs, while being excluded from other resources for reasons of privacy. It is @@ -319,9 +319,9 @@ by which user credentials are validated and filtered and appropriate rights and privileges are allocated.

    - - - + + + Unfortunately, network resources tend to have their own Identity Management facilities, the quality and manageability of which varies from quite poor to exceptionally good. Corporations that use a mixture @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ What was once called Yellow Pages is today known as Network Information System (NIS).

    - + NIS gained a strong following throughout the UNIX/VMS space in a short period of time and retained that appeal and use for over a decade. Security concerns and inherent limitations have caused it to enter its @@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ demands as the demand for directory services that can be coupled with other information systems is catching on.

    - - - + + + Nevertheless, both NIS and NIS+ continue to hold ground in business areas where UNIX still has major sway. Examples of organizations that remain firmly attached to the use of NIS and @@ -353,14 +353,14 @@ and large corporations that have a scientific or engineering focus.

    - - + + Today's networking world needs a scalable, distributed Identity Management infrastructure, commonly called a directory. The most popular technologies today are Microsoft Active Directory service and a number of LDAP implementations.

    - + The problem of managing multiple directories has become a focal point over the past decade, creating a large market for metadirectory products and services that allow organizations that @@ -369,15 +369,15 @@ another. The attendant benefit to end users is the promise of having to remember and deal with fewer login identities and passwords.

    - + The challenge of every large network is to find the optimum balance of internal systems and facilities for Identity Management resources. How well the solution is chosen and implemented has potentially significant impact on network bandwidth and systems response needs.

    - - - + + + In ???, you implemented a single LDAP server for the entire network. This may work for smaller networks, but almost certainly fails to meet the needs of large and complex networks. The @@ -386,8 +386,8 @@ What is the best method for implementing master/slave LDAP servers within the context of a distributed 2,000-user network is a question that remains to be answered.

    - - + + One possibility that has great appeal is to create a single, large distributed domain. The practical implications of this design (see ???) demands the placement of @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ productivity against the cost of network management and maintenance.

    - + The network design in ??? takes the approach that management of networks that are too remote to be managed effectively from New York ought to be given a certain degree of @@ -409,22 +409,22 @@ the ability for network users to roam globally without some compromise in how they may access global resources.

    - + Desk-bound users need not be negatively affected by this design, since the use of interdomain trusts can be used to satisfy the need for global data sharing.

    - - - + + + When Samba-3 is configured to use an LDAP backend, it stores the domain account information in a directory entry. This account entry contains the domain SID. An unintended but exploitable side effect is that this makes it possible to operate with more than one PDC on a distributed network.

    - - - + + + How might this peculiar feature be exploited? The answer is simple. It is imperative that each network segment have its own WINS server. Major servers on remote network segments can be given a static WINS entry in @@ -434,8 +434,8 @@ same domain SID. Since all domain account information can be stored in a single LDAP backend, users have unfettered ability to roam.

    - - + + This concept has not been exhaustively validated, though we can see no reason why this should not work. The important facets are the following: The name of the domain must be identical in all locations. Each network segment must have @@ -446,10 +446,10 @@ on every network segment. Finally, the BDCs should each use failover LDAP servers that are in fact slave LDAP servers on the local segments.

    - - - - + + + + With a single master LDAP server, all network updates are effected on a single server. In the event that this should become excessively fragile or network bandwidth limiting, one could implement a delegated LDAP domain. This is also @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ administrators must of necessity follow the same standard procedures for managing the directory, because retroactive correction of inconsistent directory information can be exceedingly difficult. -

    Political Issues

    +

    Political Issues

    As organizations grow, the number of points of control increases also. In a large distributed organization, it is important that the Identity Management system be capable of being updated from @@ -471,11 +471,11 @@ become usable in a reasonable period, typically minutes rather than days (the old limitation of highly manual systems). -

    Implementation

    - - - - +

    Implementation

    + + + + Samba-3 has the ability to use multiple password (authentication and identity resolution) backends. The diagram in ??? demonstrates how Samba uses winbind, LDAP, and NIS, the traditional system @@ -483,13 +483,13 @@ authentication and identity resolution (obtaining a UNIX UID/GID) using the specific systems shown.

    Figure 6.1. Samba and Authentication Backend Search Pathways

    Samba and Authentication Backend Search Pathways

    - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Samba is capable of using the smbpasswd, tdbsam, xmlsam, and mysqlsam authentication databases. The SMB @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ backend. LDAP is the preferred passdb backend for distributed network operations.

    - + Additionally, it is possible to use multiple passdb backends concurrently as well as have multiple LDAP backends. As a result, you can specify a failover LDAP backend. The syntax for specifying a @@ -509,8 +509,8 @@

    This configuration tells Samba to use a single LDAP server, as shown in ???.

    Figure 6.2. Samba Configuration to Use a Single LDAP Server

    Samba Configuration to Use a Single LDAP Server

    - - + + The addition of a failover LDAP server can simply be done by adding a second entry for the failover server to the single ldapsam entry, as shown here (note the particular use of the double quotes): @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ ldapsam:ldap://slave.abmas.biz ...

    - + The effect of this style of entry is that Samba lists the users that are in both LDAP databases. If both contain the same information, it results in each record being shown twice. This is, of course, not the @@ -553,9 +553,9 @@ It is assumed that the network you are working with follows in a pattern similar to what was covered in ???. The following steps permit the operation of a master/slave OpenLDAP arrangement. -

    Procedure 6.1. Implementation Steps for an LDAP Slave Server

    1. - - +

      Procedure 6.1. Implementation Steps for an LDAP Slave Server

      1. + + Log onto the master LDAP server as root. You are about to change the configuration of the LDAP server, so it makes sense to temporarily halt it. Stop OpenLDAP from running on @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ root# service ldap stop

      2. - + Edit the /etc/openldap/slapd.conf file so it matches the content of ???.

      3. @@ -592,8 +592,8 @@ root# slapadd -v -l admin-accts.ldif

      4. - - + + Change directory to a suitable place to dump the contents of the LDAP server. The dump file (and LDIF file) is used to preload the slave LDAP server database. You can dump the database by executing: @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@

        Each record is written to the file.

      5. - + Copy the file LDAP-transfer-LDIF.txt to the intended slave LDAP server. A good location could be in the directory /etc/openldap/preload. @@ -652,9 +652,9 @@ root# chkconfig ldap on

      6. - - - + + + Go back to the master LDAP server. Execute the following to start LDAP as well as slurpd, the synchronization daemon, as shown here:

        @@ -663,10 +663,10 @@
         root#  rcslurpd start
         root#  chkconfig slurpd on
         

        - + On Red Hat Linux, check the equivalent command to start slurpd.

      7. - + On the master LDAP server you may now add an account to validate that replication is working. Assuming the configuration shown in ???, execute:

        @@ -791,12 +791,12 @@
         index sambaPrimaryGroupSID  eq
         index sambaDomainName       eq
         index default               sub
        -

      Example 6.3. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part A

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      unix charset = LOCALE
      workgroup = MEGANET2
      passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 0
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      time server = Yes
      printcap name = CUPS
      add user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -m '%u'
      delete user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-userdel '%u'
      add group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupadd -p '%g'
      delete group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupdel '%g'
      add user to group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -m '%g' '%u'
      delete user from group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -x '%g' '%u'
      set primary group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-usermod -g '%g' '%u'
      add machine script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -w '%u'
      shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
      abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      domain logons = Yes
      domain master = Yes
      wins support = Yes
      ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
      ldap machine suffix = ou=People
      ldap user suffix = ou=People
      ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
      ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
      ldap admin dn = cn=sambaadmin,dc=abmas,dc=biz
      idmap backend = ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      idmap uid = 10000-20000
      idmap gid = 10000-20000
      printer admin = root
      printing = cups

      Example 6.4. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part B

      [IPC$]
      path = /tmp
      [accounts]
      comment = Accounting Files
      path = /data/accounts
      read only = No
      [service]
      comment = Financial Services Files
      path = /data/service
      read only = No
      [pidata]
      comment = Property Insurance Files
      path = /data/pidata
      read only = No
      [homes]
      comment = Home Directories
      valid users = %S
      read only = No
      browseable = No
      [printers]
      comment = SMB Print Spool
      path = /var/spool/samba
      guest ok = Yes
      printable = Yes
      browseable = No

      Example 6.5. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part C

      [apps]
      comment = Application Files
      path = /apps
      admin users = bjones
      read only = No
      [netlogon]
      comment = Network Logon Service
      path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
      admin users = root, Administrator
      guest ok = Yes
      locking = No
      [profiles]
      comment = Profile Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [profdata]
      comment = Profile Data Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profdata
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [print$]
      comment = Printer Drivers
      path = /var/lib/samba/drivers
      write list = root
      admin users = root, Administrator

      Example 6.6. Backup Domain Controller smb.conf File Part A

      # # Global parameters
      [global]
      unix charset = LOCALE
      workgroup = MEGANET2
      netbios name = BLDG1
      passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://lapdc.abmas.biz
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 50
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      printcap name = CUPS
      show add printer wizard = No
      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      domain logons = Yes
      os level = 63
      domain master = No
      wins server = 192.168.2.1
      ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
      ldap machine suffix = ou=People
      ldap user suffix = ou=People
      ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
      ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
      ldap admin dn = cn=sambaadmin,dc=abmas,dc=biz
      utmp = Yes
      idmap backend = ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      idmap uid = 10000-20000
      idmap gid = 10000-20000
      printing = cups
      [accounts]
      comment = Accounting Files
      path = /data/accounts
      read only = No
      [service]
      comment = Financial Services Files
      path = /data/service
      read only = No

      Example 6.7. Backup Domain Controller smb.conf File Part B

      [pidata]
      comment = Property Insurance Files
      path = /data/pidata
      read only = No
      [homes]
      comment = Home Directories
      valid users = %S
      read only = No
      browseable = No
      [printers]
      comment = SMB Print Spool
      path = /var/spool/samba
      guest ok = Yes
      printable = Yes
      browseable = No
      [apps]
      comment = Application Files
      path = /apps
      admin users = bjones
      read only = No
      [netlogon]
      comment = Network Logon Service
      path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
      guest ok = Yes
      locking = No
      [profiles]
      comment = Profile Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [profdata]
      comment = Profile Data Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profdata
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes

      Key Points Learned

      • - +

      Example 6.3. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part A

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      unix charset = LOCALE
      workgroup = MEGANET2
      passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 0
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      time server = Yes
      printcap name = CUPS
      add user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -m '%u'
      delete user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-userdel '%u'
      add group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupadd -p '%g'
      delete group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupdel '%g'
      add user to group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -m '%g' '%u'
      delete user from group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -x '%g' '%u'
      set primary group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-usermod -g '%g' '%u'
      add machine script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -w '%u'
      shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
      abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      domain logons = Yes
      domain master = Yes
      wins support = Yes
      ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
      ldap machine suffix = ou=People
      ldap user suffix = ou=People
      ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
      ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
      ldap admin dn = cn=sambaadmin,dc=abmas,dc=biz
      idmap backend = ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      idmap uid = 10000-20000
      idmap gid = 10000-20000
      printer admin = root
      printing = cups

      Example 6.4. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part B

      [IPC$]
      path = /tmp
      [accounts]
      comment = Accounting Files
      path = /data/accounts
      read only = No
      [service]
      comment = Financial Services Files
      path = /data/service
      read only = No
      [pidata]
      comment = Property Insurance Files
      path = /data/pidata
      read only = No
      [homes]
      comment = Home Directories
      valid users = %S
      read only = No
      browseable = No
      [printers]
      comment = SMB Print Spool
      path = /var/spool/samba
      guest ok = Yes
      printable = Yes
      browseable = No

      Example 6.5. Primary Domain Controller smb.conf File Part C

      [apps]
      comment = Application Files
      path = /apps
      admin users = bjones
      read only = No
      [netlogon]
      comment = Network Logon Service
      path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
      admin users = root, Administrator
      guest ok = Yes
      locking = No
      [profiles]
      comment = Profile Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [profdata]
      comment = Profile Data Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profdata
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [print$]
      comment = Printer Drivers
      path = /var/lib/samba/drivers
      write list = root
      admin users = root, Administrator

      Example 6.6. Backup Domain Controller smb.conf File Part A

      # # Global parameters
      [global]
      unix charset = LOCALE
      workgroup = MEGANET2
      netbios name = BLDG1
      passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://lapdc.abmas.biz
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 50
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      printcap name = CUPS
      show add printer wizard = No
      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      domain logons = Yes
      os level = 63
      domain master = No
      wins server = 192.168.2.1
      ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
      ldap machine suffix = ou=People
      ldap user suffix = ou=People
      ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
      ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
      ldap admin dn = cn=sambaadmin,dc=abmas,dc=biz
      utmp = Yes
      idmap backend = ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      idmap uid = 10000-20000
      idmap gid = 10000-20000
      printing = cups
      [accounts]
      comment = Accounting Files
      path = /data/accounts
      read only = No
      [service]
      comment = Financial Services Files
      path = /data/service
      read only = No

      Example 6.7. Backup Domain Controller smb.conf File Part B

      [pidata]
      comment = Property Insurance Files
      path = /data/pidata
      read only = No
      [homes]
      comment = Home Directories
      valid users = %S
      read only = No
      browseable = No
      [printers]
      comment = SMB Print Spool
      path = /var/spool/samba
      guest ok = Yes
      printable = Yes
      browseable = No
      [apps]
      comment = Application Files
      path = /apps
      admin users = bjones
      read only = No
      [netlogon]
      comment = Network Logon Service
      path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
      guest ok = Yes
      locking = No
      [profiles]
      comment = Profile Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes
      [profdata]
      comment = Profile Data Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profdata
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes

      Key Points Learned

      • + Where Samba-3 is used as a domain controller, the use of LDAP is an essential component to permit the use of BDCs.

      • - + Replication of the LDAP master server to create a network of BDCs is an important mechanism for limiting WAN traffic.

      • @@ -808,55 +808,55 @@ Roaming profiles must be contained to the local network segment. Any departure from this may clog wide-area arteries and slow legitimate network traffic to a crawl. -

      Figure 6.6. Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design A

      Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design A

      Figure 6.7. Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design B

      Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design B

      Questions and Answers

      +

    Figure 6.6. Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design A

    Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design A

    Figure 6.7. Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design B

    Network Topology 2000 User Complex Design B

    Questions and Answers

    There is much rumor and misinformation regarding the use of MS Windows networking protocols. These questions are just a few of those frequently asked. -

    +

    DHCP networkbandwidth Is it true that DHCP uses lots of WAN bandwidth? -
    +
    background communication LDAPmaster/slavebackground communication How much background communication takes place between a master LDAP server and its slave LDAP servers? -
    +
    LDAP has a database. Is LDAP not just a fancy database front end? -
    +
    OpenLDAP Can Active Directory obtain account information from an OpenLDAP server? -
    +
    What are the parts of a roaming profile? How large is each part? -
    +
    Can the My Documents folder be stored on a network drive? -
    +
    wide-area networkbandwidth WINS How much WAN bandwidth does WINS consume? -
    +
    How many BDCs should I have? What is the right number of Windows clients per server? -
    +
    NIS serverLDAP I've heard that you can store NIS accounts in LDAP. Is LDAP not just a smarter way to run an NIS server? -
    +
    Can I use NIS in place of LDAP? -

    - - +

    + + Is it true that DHCP uses lots of WAN bandwidth?

    - - - + + + It is a smart practice to localize DHCP servers on each network segment. As a rule, there should be two DHCP servers per network segment. This means that if one server fails, there is always another to service user needs. DHCP requests use only UDP broadcast protocols. It is possible to run a DHCP Relay Agent on network routers. This makes it possible to run fewer DHCP servers.

    - - + + A DHCP network address request and confirmation usually results in about six UDP packets. The packets are from 60 to 568 bytes in length. Let us consider a site that has 300 DHCP clients and that uses a 24-hour IP address lease. This means that all clients renew @@ -874,28 +874,28 @@

    From this can be seen that the traffic impact would be minimal.

    - - + + Even when DHCP is configured to do DNS update (dynamic DNS) over a wide-area link, the impact of the update is no more than the DHCP IP address renewal traffic and thus still insignificant for most practical purposes. -

    - - +

    + + How much background communication takes place between a master LDAP server and its slave LDAP servers?

    - + The process that controls the replication of data from the master LDAP server to the slave LDAP servers is called slurpd. The slurpd remains nascent (quiet) until an update must be propagated. The propagation traffic per LDAP slave to update (add/modify/delete) two user accounts requires less than 10KB traffic. -

    +

    LDAP has a database. Is LDAP not just a fancy database front end?

    - - - - + + + + LDAP does store its data in a database of sorts. In fact, the LDAP backend is an application-specific data storage system. This type of database is indexed so that records can be rapidly located, but the database is not generic and can be used only in particular pre-programmed ways. General external @@ -904,17 +904,17 @@ orientation and typically allows external programs to perform ad hoc queries, even across data tables. An LDAP front end is a purpose-built tool that has a search orientation that is designed around specific simple queries. The term database is heavily overloaded and thus much misunderstood. -

    - +

    + Can Active Directory obtain account information from an OpenLDAP server?

    - + No, at least not directly. It is possible to provision Active Directory from and/or to an OpenLDAP database through use of a metadirectory server. Microsoft MMS (now called MIIS) can interface to OpenLDAP using standard LDAP queries and updates. -

    +

    What are the parts of a roaming profile? How large is each part? -

    +

    A roaming profile consists of

    • Desktop folders such as Desktop, My Documents, @@ -922,39 +922,39 @@ Cookies, Application Data, Local Settings, and more. See ???, ???.

      - + Each of these can be anywhere from a few bytes to gigabytes in capacity. Fortunately, all such folders can be redirected to network drive resources. See ??? for more information regarding folder redirection.

    • A static or rewritable portion that is typically only a few files (2-5 KB of information).

    • - - + + The registry load file that modifies the HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive. This is the NTUSER.DAT file. It can be from 0.4 to 1.5 MB.

    - + Microsoft Outlook PST files may be stored in the Local Settings\Application Data folder. It can be up to 2 GB in size per PST file. -

    +

    Can the My Documents folder be stored on a network drive?

    - - + + Yes. More correctly, such folders can be redirected to network shares. No specific network drive connection is required. Registry settings permit this to be redirected directly to a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) resource, though it is possible to specify a network drive letter instead of a UNC name. See ???. -

    - - - +

    + + + How much WAN bandwidth does WINS consume?

    - - - + + + MS Windows clients cache information obtained from WINS lookups in a local NetBIOS name cache. This keeps WINS lookups to a minimum. On a network with 3500 MS Windows clients and a central WINS server, the total bandwidth demand measured at the WINS server, averaged over an 8-hour working day, @@ -966,7 +966,7 @@

    In conclusion, the total load afforded through WINS traffic is again marginal to total operational usage as it should be. -

    +

    How many BDCs should I have? What is the right number of Windows clients per server?

    It is recommended to have at least one BDC per network segment, including the segment served @@ -980,19 +980,19 @@

    As unsatisfactory as the answer might sound, it all depends on network and server load characteristics. -

    - +

    + I've heard that you can store NIS accounts in LDAP. Is LDAP not just a smarter way to run an NIS server?

    The correct answer to both questions is yes. But do understand that an LDAP server has a configurable schema that can store far more information for many more purposes than just NIS. -

    +

    Can I use NIS in place of LDAP?

    - - + + No. The NIS database does not have provision to store Microsoft encrypted passwords and does not deal with the types of data necessary for interoperability with Microsoft Windows networking. The use of LDAP with Samba requires the use of a number of schemas, one of which is the NIS schema, but also diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/appendix.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/appendix.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/appendix.html 2006-01-29 10:18:17.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/appendix.html 2006-07-06 05:19:12.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ -Chapter 15. A Collection of Useful Tidbits

    Chapter 15. A Collection of Useful Tidbits

    - - +Chapter 15. A Collection of Useful Tidbits

    Chapter 15. A Collection of Useful Tidbits

    + + Information presented here is considered to be either basic or well-known material that is informative yet helpful. Over the years, I have observed an interesting behavior. There is an expectation that the process for joining a Windows client to a Samba-controlled Windows domain may somehow involve steps different from doing so with Windows NT4 or a Windows ADS domain. Be assured that the steps are identical, as shown in the example given below.

    Joining a Domain: Windows 200x/XP Professional

    - + Microsoft Windows NT/200x/XP Professional platforms can participate in Domain Security. This section steps through the process for making a Windows 200x/XP Professional machine a member of a Domain Security environment. It should be noted that this process is identical when joining a domain that is controlled by Windows NT4/200x as well as a Samba PDC. -

    Procedure 15.1. Steps to Join a Domain

    1. +

      Procedure 15.1. Steps to Join a Domain

      1. Click Start.

      2. Right-click My Computer, and then select Properties. @@ -50,19 +50,19 @@ The “Welcome to the MIDEARTH domain” dialog box should appear. At this point, the machine must be rebooted. Joining the domain is now complete.

      - - + + The screen capture shown in ??? has a button labeled More.... This button opens a panel in which you can set (or change) the Primary DNS suffix of the computer. This is a parameter that mainly affects members of Microsoft Active Directory. Active Directory is heavily oriented around the DNS namespace.

      - - + + Where NetBIOS technology uses WINS as well as UDP broadcast as key mechanisms for name resolution, Active Directory servers register their services with the Microsoft Dynamic DNS server. Windows clients must be able to query the correct DNS server to find the services (like which machines are domain controllers or which machines have the Netlogon service running).

      - + The default setting of the Primary DNS suffix is the Active Directory domain name. When you change the Primary DNS suffix, this does not affect domain membership, but it can break network browsing and the ability to resolve your computer name to a valid IP address. @@ -70,12 +70,12 @@ The Primary DNS suffix parameter principally affects MS Windows clients that are members of an Active Directory domain. Where the client is a member of a Samba domain, it is preferable to leave this field blank.

      - + According to Microsoft documentation, “If this computer belongs to a group with Group Policy enabled on Primary DNS suffice of this computer, the string specified in the Group Policy is used as the primary DNS suffix and you might need to restart your computer to view the correct setting. The local setting is used only if Group Policy is disabled or unspecified.” -

    Samba System File Location

    +

    Samba System File Location

    One of the frustrations expressed by subscribers to the Samba mailing lists revolves around the choice of where the default Samba Team build and installation process locates its Samba files. The location, chosen in the early 1990s, for the default installation is in the /usr/local/samba directory. This is a perfectly reasonable location, particularly given all the other @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@

    Several UNIX vendors, and Linux vendors in particular, elected to locate the Samba files in a location other than the Samba Team default. -

    +

    Linux vendors, working in conjunction with the Free Standards Group (FSG), Linux Standards Base (LSB), and File Hierarchy System (FHS), have elected to locate the configuration files under the /etc/samba directory, common binary files (those used by users) in the /usr/bin directory, and the administrative files (daemons) in the @@ -92,13 +92,13 @@ /usr/share/swat. There are additional support files for smbd in the /usr/lib/samba directory tree. The files located there include the dynamically loadable modules for the passdb backend as well as for the VFS modules. -

    +

    Samba creates runtime control files and generates log files. The runtime control files (tdb and dat files) are stored in the /var/lib/samba directory. Log files are created in /var/log/samba.

    When Samba is built and installed using the default Samba Team process, all files are located under the /usr/local/samba directory tree. This makes it simple to find the files that Samba owns. -

    +

    One way to find the Samba files that are installed on your UNIX/Linux system is to search for the location of all files called smbd. Here is an example:

    @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
     	

    Many people have been caught by installation of Samba using the default Samba Team process when it was already installed by the platform vendor's method. If your platform uses RPM format packages, you can check to see if Samba is installed by - executing: + executing:

     root#  rpm -qa | grep samba
     samba3-pdb-3.0.20-1
    @@ -143,9 +143,9 @@
     samba3-doc-3.0.20-1
     samba3-client-3.0.20-1
     samba3-cifsmount-3.0.20-1
    -	

    +

    The package names, of course, vary according to how the vendor, or the binary package builder, prepared them. -

    Starting Samba

    +

    Starting Samba

    Samba essentially consists of two or three daemons. A daemon is a UNIX application that runs in the background and provides services. An example of a service is the Apache Web server for which the daemon is called httpd. In the case of Samba, there are three daemons, two of which are needed as a minimum. @@ -186,19 +186,19 @@ fi exit 0

    nmbd

    - - + + This daemon handles all name registration and resolution requests. It is the primary vehicle involved in network browsing. It handles all UDP-based protocols. The nmbd daemon should be the first command started as part of the Samba startup process.

    smbd

    - - + + This daemon handles all TCP/IP-based connection services for file- and print-based operations. It also manages local authentication. It should be started immediately following the startup of nmbd.

    winbindd

    - - + + This daemon should be started when Samba is a member of a Windows NT4 or ADS domain. It is also needed when Samba has trust relationships with another domain. The winbindd daemon will check the smb.conf file for the presence of the idmap uid and idmap gid @@ -252,22 +252,22 @@ echo "Usage: smb {start|stop|restart|status}" exit 1 esac -

    +

    SUSE Linux implements individual control over each Samba daemon. A Samba control script that can be conveniently executed from the command line is shown in ???. This can be located in the directory /sbin in a file called samba. This type of control script should be owned by user root and group root, and set so that only root can execute it. -

    +

    A sample startup script for a Red Hat Linux system is shown in ???. This file could be located in the directory /etc/rc.d and can be called samba. A similar startup script is required to control winbind. If you want to find more information regarding startup scripts please refer to the packaging section of the Samba source code distribution tarball. The packaging files for each platform include a startup control file. -

    DNS Configuration Files

    +

    DNS Configuration Files

    The following files are common to all DNS server configurations. Rather than repeat them multiple times, they are presented here for general reference. -

    The Forward Zone File for the Loopback Adaptor

    +

    The Forward Zone File for the Loopback Adaptor

    The forward zone file for the loopback address never changes. An example file is shown in ???. All traffic destined for an IP address that is hosted on a physical interface on the machine itself is routed to the loopback adaptor. This is @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ IN NS @ IN A 127.0.0.1 -

    The Reverse Zone File for the Loopback Adaptor

    +

    The Reverse Zone File for the Loopback Adaptor

    The reverse zone file for the loopback address as shown in ??? is necessary so that references to the address 127.0.0.1 can be resolved to the correct name of the interface. @@ -344,15 +344,15 @@ . 3600000 NS M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET. M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET. 3600000 A 202.12.27.33 ; End of File -

    DNS Root Server Hint File

    +

    DNS Root Server Hint File

    The content of the root hints file as shown in ??? changes slowly over time. Periodically this file should be updated from the source shown. Because of its size, this file is located at the end of this chapter. -

    Alternative LDAP Database Initialization

    +

    Alternative LDAP Database Initialization

    The following procedure may be used as an alternative means of configuring the initial LDAP database. Many administrators prefer to have greater control over how system files get configured. -

    Initialization of the LDAP Database

    +

    Initialization of the LDAP Database

    The first step to get the LDAP server ready for action is to create the LDIF file from which the LDAP database will be preloaded. This is necessary to create the containers into which the user, group, and other accounts are written. It is also necessary to @@ -705,14 +705,14 @@ sambaGroupType: 2 displayName: Domain Users description: Domain Users -

    The LDAP Account Manager

    - - - - - - - +

    The LDAP Account Manager

    + + + + + + + The LDAP Account Manager (LAM) is an application suite that has been written in PHP. LAM can be used with any Web server that has PHP4 support. It connects to the LDAP server either using unencrypted connections or via SSL/TLS. LAM can be used to manage @@ -724,24 +724,24 @@ The current version of LAM is 0.4.9. Release of version 0.5 is expected in the third quarter of 2005.

    - - - + + + Requirements:

    • A web server that will work with PHP4.

    • PHP4 (available from the PHP home page.)

    • OpenLDAP 2.0 or later.

    • A Web browser that supports CSS.

    • Perl.

    • The gettext package.

    • mcrypt + mhash (optional).

    • It is also a good idea to install SSL support.

    LAM is a useful tool that provides a simple Web-based device that can be used to manage the contents of the LDAP directory to: - - - + + +

    • Display user/group/host and Domain entries.

    • Manage entries (Add/Delete/Edit).

    • Filter and sort entries.

    • Store and use multiple operating profiles.

    • Edit organizational units (OUs).

    • Upload accounts from a file.

    • Is compatible with Samba-2.2.x and Samba-3.

    When correctly configured, LAM allows convenient management of UNIX (Posix) and Samba user, group, and windows domain member machine accounts.

    - - - - + + + + The default password is “lam.” It is highly recommended that you use only an SSL connection to your Web server for all remote operations involving LAM. If you want secure connections, you must configure your Apache Web server to permit connections @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ For example, on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9, copy to the /srv/www/htdocs directory.

  • - + Set file permissions using the following commands:

     root#  chown -R wwwrun:www /srv/www/htdocs/lam
    @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@
     root#  chmod 755 /srv/www/htdocs/lam/lib/*pl
     

  • - + Using your favorite editor create the following config.cfg LAM configuration file:

    @@ -778,8 +778,8 @@
     root#  cp config.cfg_sample config.cfg
     root#  vi config.cfg
     

    - - + + An example file is shown in ???. This is the minimum configuration that must be completed. The LAM profile file can be created using a convenient wizard that is part of the LAM @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ lam.conf then, using your favorite editor, change the settings to match local site needs.

  • - + An example of a working file is shown here in ???. This file has been stripped of comments to keep the size small. The comments and help information provided in the profile file that the wizard creates @@ -802,12 +802,12 @@ Your configuration file obviously reflects the configuration options that are preferred at your site.

    - + It is important that your LDAP server is running at the time that LAM is being configured. This permits you to validate correct operation. An example of the LAM login screen is provided in ???.

    Figure 15.6. The LDAP Account Manager Login Screen

    The LDAP Account Manager Login Screen

    - + The LAM configuration editor has a number of options that must be managed correctly. An example of use of the LAM configuration editor is shown in ???. It is important that you correctly set the minimum and maximum UID/GID values that are @@ -817,13 +817,13 @@ the initial settings to be made. Do not forget to reset these to sensible values before using LAM to add additional users and groups.

    Figure 15.7. The LDAP Account Manager Configuration Screen

    The LDAP Account Manager Configuration Screen

    - + LAM has some nice, but unusual features. For example, one unexpected feature in most application screens permits the generation of a PDF file that lists configuration information. This is a well thought out facility. This option has been edited out of the following screen shots to conserve space.

    - + When you log onto LAM the opening screen drops you right into the user manager as shown in ???. This is a logical action as it permits the most-needed facility to be used immediately. The editing of an existing user, as with the addition of a new user, @@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ shows a sub-screen from the group editor that permits users to be assigned secondary group memberships.

    Figure 15.9. The LDAP Account Manager Group Edit Screen

    The LDAP Account Manager Group Edit Screen

    Figure 15.10. The LDAP Account Manager Group Membership Edit Screen

    The LDAP Account Manager Group Membership Edit Screen

    - + The final screen presented here is one that you should not normally need to use. Host accounts will be automatically managed using the smbldap-tools scripts. This means that the screen ??? will, in most cases, not be used. @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ samba3: yes cachetimeout: 5 pwdhash: SSHA -

    IDEALX Management Console

    +

    IDEALX Management Console

    IMC (the IDEALX Mamagement Console) is a tool that can be used as the basis for a comprehensive web-based management interface for UNIX and Linux systems.

    @@ -897,7 +897,7 @@

    For further information regarding IMC refer to the web site. Prebuilt RPM packages are also available. -

    Effect of Setting File and Directory SUID/SGID Permissions Explained

    +

    Effect of Setting File and Directory SUID/SGID Permissions Explained

    The setting of the SUID/SGID bits on the file or directory permissions flag has particular consequences. If the file is executable and the SUID bit is set, it executes with the privilege of (with the UID of) the owner of the file. For example, if you are logged onto a system as @@ -967,34 +967,34 @@ total 1 drw-rw-r-- 2 bobj Domain Users 12346 Dec 18 18:11 maryvfile.txt

    -

    Shared Data Integrity

    +

    Shared Data Integrity

    The integrity of shared data is often viewed as a particularly emotional issue, especially where there are concurrent problems with multiuser data access. Contrary to the assertions of some who have experienced problems in either area, the cause has nothing to do with the phases of the moons of Jupiter.

    The solution to concurrent multiuser data access problems must consider three separate areas - from which the problem may stem: -

    • application-level locking controls

    • client-side locking controls

    • server-side locking controls

    + from which the problem may stem: +

    • application-level locking controls

    • client-side locking controls

    • server-side locking controls

    Many database applications use some form of application-level access control. An example of one well-known application that uses application-level locking is Microsoft Access. Detailed guidance is provided here because this is the most common application for which problems have been reported. -

    +

    Common applications that are affected by client- and server-side locking controls include MS Excel and Act!. Important locking guidance is provided here. -

    Microsoft Access

    +

    Microsoft Access

    The best advice that can be given is to carefully read the Microsoft knowledgebase articles that cover this area. Examples of relevant documents include: -

    • http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;208778

    • http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;299373

    +

    • http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;208778

    • http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;299373

    Make sure that your MS Access database file is configured for multiuser access (not set for exclusive open). Open MS Access on each client workstation, then set the following: (Menu bar) Tools+Options+[tab] General. Set network path to Default database folder: \\server\share\folder.

    You can configure MS Access file sharing behavior as follows: click [tab] Advanced. - Set: -

    • Default open mode: Shared

    • Default Record Locking: Edited Record

    • Open databases using record_level locking

    + Set: +

    • Default open mode: Shared

    • Default Record Locking: Edited Record

    • Open databases using record_level locking

    You must now commit the changes so that they will take effect. To do so, click ApplyOk. At this point, you should exit MS Access, restart it, and then validate that these settings have not changed. -

    Act! Database Sharing

    +

    Act! Database Sharing

    Where the server sharing the ACT! database(s) is running Samba,or Windows NT, 200x, or XP, you must disable opportunistic locking on the server and all workstations. Failure to do so results in data corruption. This information is available from the Act! Web site @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ 1998223162925 as well as from article 200110485036. -

    +

    These documents clearly state that opportunistic locking must be disabled on both the server (Samba in the case we are interested in here), as well as on every workstation from which the centrally shared Act! database will be accessed. Act! provides @@ -1010,18 +1010,18 @@ registry settings that may otherwise interfere with the operation of Act! Registered Act! users may download this utility from the Act! Web site. -

    Opportunistic Locking Controls

    +

    Opportunistic Locking Controls

    Third-party Windows applications may not be compatible with the use of opportunistic file - and record locking. For applications that are known not to be compatible,[14] oplock + and record locking. For applications that are known not to be compatible,[14] oplock support may need to be disabled both on the Samba server and on the Windows workstations. -

    +

    Oplocks enable a Windows client to cache parts of a file that are being edited. Another windows client may then request to open the file with the ability to write to it. The server will then ask the original workstation that had the file open with a write lock to release its lock. Before doing so, that workstation must flush the file from cache memory to the disk or network drive. -

    +

    Disabling of Oplocks usage may require server and client changes. Oplocks may be disabled by file, by file pattern, on the share, or on the Samba server. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/Big500users.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/Big500users.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/Big500users.html 2006-01-29 10:18:10.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/Big500users.html 2006-07-06 05:19:04.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Chapter 4. The 500-User Office

    Chapter 4. The 500-User Office

    +Chapter 4. The 500-User Office

    Chapter 4. The 500-User Office

    The Samba-3 networking you explored in ??? covers the finer points of configuration of peripheral services such as DHCP and DNS, and WINS. You experienced implementation of a simple configuration of the services that are important adjuncts @@ -17,9 +17,9 @@ that same approach to printing, but ??? presents an opportunity to make printing more complex for the administrator while making it easier for the user.

    - - - + + + ??? demonstrates operation of a DHCP server and a DNS server as well as a central WINS server. You validated the operation of these services and saw an effective implementation of a Samba domain controller using the @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ improve network management and control while reducing human resource overheads. You should take the opportunity to innovate and expand on the methods presented here and explore them to the fullest. -

    Introduction

    +

    Introduction

    Business continues to go well for Abmas. Mr. Meany is driving your success and the network continues to grow thanks to the hard work Christine has done. You recently hired Stanley Soroka as manager of information systems. Christine recommended Stan @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ and to allow Stan and Christine to fully stage the new network and test it before it is rolled out. Your strategy is to complete the new network so that it is ready for operation when the old office moves into the new premises. -

    Assignment Tasks

    +

    Assignment Tasks

    The acquired business had 280 network users. The old Abmas building housed 220 network users in unbelievably cramped conditions. The network that initially served 130 users now handles 220 users quite well. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ DirectPointe Inc. receives from you a new standard desktop configuration every four months. They automatically roll that out to each desktop system. You must keep DirectPointe informed of all changes. -

    +

    The new network has a single Samba Primary Domain Controller (PDC) located in the Network Operation Center (NOC). Buildings 1 and 2 each have a local server for local application servicing. It is a domain member. The new system @@ -115,8 +115,8 @@

    Printing is based on raw pass-through facilities just as it has been used so far. All printer drivers are installed on the desktop and notebook computers. -

    Dissection and Discussion

    - +

    Dissection and Discussion

    + The example you are building in this chapter is of a network design that works, but this does not make it a design that is recommended. As a general rule, there should be at least one Backup Domain Controller (BDC) per 150 Windows network clients. The principle behind @@ -127,22 +127,22 @@ responsiveness. This network will have 500 clients serviced by one central domain controller. This is not a good omen for user satisfaction. You, of course, address this very soon (see ???). -

    Technical Issues

    +

    Technical Issues

    Stan has talked you into a horrible compromise, but it is addressed. Just make certain that the performance of this network is well validated before going live.

    Design decisions made in this design include the following:

    • - - - + + + A single PDC is being implemented. This limitation is based on the choice not to use LDAP. Many network administrators fear using LDAP because of the perceived complexity of implementation and management of an LDAP-based backend for all user identity management as well as to store network access credentials.

    • - - + + Because of the refusal to use an LDAP (ldapsam) passdb backend at this time, the only choice that makes sense with 500 users is to use the tdbsam passwd backend. This type of backend is not receptive to replication to BDCs. If the tdbsam @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ for a simple mode of operation but has to be balanced with network performance and integrity of operations considerations.

    • - + A single central WINS server is being used. The PDC is also the WINS server. Any attempt to operate a routed network without a WINS server while using NetBIOS over TCP/IP protocols does not work unless on each client the name resolution @@ -167,12 +167,12 @@ At this time the Samba WINS database cannot be replicated. That is why a single WINS server is being implemented. This should work without a problem.

    • - + BDCs make use of winbindd to provide access to domain security credentials for file system access and object storage.

    • - - + + Configuration of Windows XP Professional clients is achieved using DHCP. Each subnet has its own DHCP server. Backup DHCP serving is provided by one alternate DHCP server. This necessitates enabling of the DHCP Relay agent on @@ -188,13 +188,13 @@ The network address and subnetmask chosen provide 1022 usable IP addresses in each subnet. If in the future more addresses are required, it would make sense to add further subnets rather than change addressing. -

    Political Issues

    +

    Political Issues

    This case gets close to the real world. You and I know the right way to implement domain control. Politically, we have to navigate a minefield. In this case, the need is to get the PDC rolled out in compliance with expectations and also to be ready to save the day by having the real solution ready before it is needed. That real solution is presented in ???. -

    Implementation

    +

    Implementation

    The following configuration process begins following installation of Red Hat Fedora Core2 on the three servers shown in the network topology diagram in ???. You have selected hardware that is appropriate to the task. @@ -205,9 +205,9 @@

    The abbreviation shown in this table as {VLN} refers to the directory location beginning with /var/lib/named. -

    Table 4.1. Domain: MEGANET, File Locations for Servers

    File InformationServer Name
    SourceTarget LocationMASSIVEBLDG1BLDG2
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/samba/dc-common.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/samba/common.confYesYesYes
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confNoYesNo
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confNoNoYes
    ???/etc/samba/dommem.confNoYesYes
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confNoYesNo
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confNoNoYes
    ???/etc/named.conf (part A)YesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part B)YesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part C)YesNoNo
    ???{VLN}/master/abmas.biz.hostsYesNoNo
    ???{VLN}/master/abmas.us.hostsYesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part A)NoYesYes
    ???/etc/named.conf (part B)NoYesYes
    ???{VLN}/localhost.zoneYesYesYes
    ???{VLN}/127.0.0.zoneYesYesYes
    ???{VLN}/root.hintYesYesYes

    Server Preparation: All Servers

    +

    Table 4.1. Domain: MEGANET, File Locations for Servers

    File InformationServer Name
    SourceTarget LocationMASSIVEBLDG1BLDG2
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/samba/dc-common.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/samba/common.confYesYesYes
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confNoYesNo
    ???/etc/samba/smb.confNoNoYes
    ???/etc/samba/dommem.confNoYesYes
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confYesNoNo
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confNoYesNo
    ???/etc/dhcpd.confNoNoYes
    ???/etc/named.conf (part A)YesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part B)YesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part C)YesNoNo
    ???{VLN}/master/abmas.biz.hostsYesNoNo
    ???{VLN}/master/abmas.us.hostsYesNoNo
    ???/etc/named.conf (part A)NoYesYes
    ???/etc/named.conf (part B)NoYesYes
    ???{VLN}/localhost.zoneYesYesYes
    ???{VLN}/127.0.0.zoneYesYesYes
    ???{VLN}/root.hintYesYesYes

    Server Preparation: All Servers

    The following steps apply to all servers. Follow each step carefully. -

    Procedure 4.1. Server Preparation Steps

    1. +

      Procedure 4.1. Server Preparation Steps

      1. Using the UNIX/Linux system tools, set the name of the server as shown in the network topology diagram in ???. For SUSE Linux products, the tool that permits this is called yast2; for Red Hat Linux products, @@ -221,8 +221,8 @@ root# hostname -f

      2. - - + + Edit your /etc/hosts file to include the primary names and addresses of all network interfaces that are on the host server. This is necessary so that during startup the system is able to resolve all its own names to the IP address prior to @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ CUPS print server is started before the DNS server (named), you should also include an entry for the printers in the /etc/hosts file.

      3. - + All DNS name resolution should be handled locally. To ensure that the server is configured correctly to handle this, edit /etc/resolv.conf so it has the following content: @@ -241,8 +241,8 @@ This instructs the name resolver function (when configured correctly) to ask the DNS server that is running locally to resolve names to addresses.

      4. - - + + Add the root user to the password backend:

         root#  smbpasswd -a root
        @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@
         			deleted. If for any reason the account is deleted, you may not be able to recreate this account
         			without considerable trouble.
         			

      5. - - + + Create the username map file to permit the root account to be called Administrator from the Windows network environment. To do this, create the file /etc/samba/smbusers with the following contents: @@ -294,16 +294,16 @@ Follow the instructions in the printer manufacturer's manuals to permit printing to port 9100. Use any other port the manufacturer specifies for direct mode, raw printing. This allows the CUPS spooler to print using raw mode protocols. - - + +

      6. - + Only on the server to which the printer is attached configure the CUPS Print Queues as follows:

         root#  lpadmin -p printque -v socket://printer-name.abmas.biz:9100 -E
         

        - + This step creates the necessary print queue to use no assigned print filter. This is ideal for raw printing, that is, printing without use of filters. The name printque is the name you have assigned for @@ -323,9 +323,9 @@ root# /usr/bin/accept printque

      7. - - - + + + This step, as well as the next one, may be omitted where CUPS version 1.1.18 or later is in use. Although it does no harm to follow it anyway, and may help to avoid time spent later trying to figure out why print jobs may be @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ application/octet-stream application/vnd.cups-raw 0 -

      8. - + Edit the file /etc/cups/mime.types to uncomment the line:

         application/octet-stream
        @@ -359,17 +359,17 @@
         	processes to automap Windows client drives to an application server that is nearest to the client. This
         	is considerably more difficult when a single PDC is used on a routed network. It can be done, but not
         	as elegantly as you see in the next chapter.
        -	

    Server-Specific Preparation

    +

    Server-Specific Preparation

    There are some steps that apply to particular server functionality only. Each step is critical to correct server operation. The following step-by-step installation guidance will assist you in working through the process of configuring the PDC and then both BDC's. -

    Configuration for Server: MASSIVE

    +

    Configuration for Server: MASSIVE

    The steps presented here attempt to implement Samba installation in a generic manner. While some steps are clearly specific to Linux, it should not be too difficult to apply them to your platform of choice. -

    Procedure 4.2. Primary Domain Controller Preparation

    1. - - +

      Procedure 4.2. Primary Domain Controller Preparation

      1. + + The host server acts as a router between the two internal network segments as well as for all Internet access. This necessitates that IP forwarding be enabled. This can be achieved by adding to the /etc/rc.d/boot.local an entry as follows: @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ startup files as follows: (SUSE) /etc/rc.d/boot.local, (Red Hat) /etc/rc.d/init.d/rc.local.

      2. - + The final step that must be completed is to edit the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. This file controls the operation of the various resolver libraries that are part of the Linux Glibc libraries. Edit this file so that it contains the following entries: @@ -405,24 +405,24 @@ hosts: files dns wins

      3. - + Create and map Windows domain groups to UNIX groups. A sample script is provided in ???. Create a file containing this script. You called yours /etc/samba/initGrps.sh. Set this file so it can be executed and then execute the script. An example of the execution of this script as well as its validation are shown in Section 4.3.2, Step 5.

      4. - - - + + + For each user who needs to be given a Windows domain account, make an entry in the /etc/passwd file as well as in the Samba password backend. Use the system tool of your choice to create the UNIX system account, and use the Samba smbpasswd to create a domain user account.

        - - - + + + There are a number of tools for user management under UNIX, such as useradd, adduser, as well as a plethora of custom tools. With the tool of your choice, create a home directory for each user. @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ file is /data. Format the file system as required and mount the formatted file system partition using appropriate system tools.

      5. - + Create the top-level file storage directories for data and applications as follows:

         root#  mkdir -p /data/{accounts,finsvcs,pidata}
        @@ -475,8 +475,8 @@
         root#  chmod ug+wrx,o+rx,-w /var/lib/samba/profiles/'username'
         

      6. - - + + Create a logon script. It is important that each line is correctly terminated with a carriage return and line-feed combination (i.e., DOS encoding). The following procedure works if the right tools (unxi2dos and dos2unix) are installed. @@ -518,8 +518,8 @@ The following steps will guide you through the nuances of implementing BDCs for the broadcast isolated network segments. Remember that if the target installation platform is not Linux, it may be necessary to adapt some commands to the equivalent on the target platform. -

        Procedure 4.3. Backup Domain Controller Configuration Steps

        1. - +

          Procedure 4.3. Backup Domain Controller Configuration Steps

          1. + The final step that must be completed is to edit the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. This file controls the operation of the various resolver libraries that are part of the Linux Glibc libraries. Edit this file so that it contains the following entries: @@ -532,14 +532,14 @@ Follow the steps outlined in ??? to start all services. Do not start Samba at this time. Samba is controlled by the process called smb.

          2. - + You must now attempt to join the domain member servers to the domain. The following instructions should be executed to effect this:

             root#  net rpc join 
             

          3. - + You now start the Samba services by executing:

             root#  service smb start
            @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@
                                     Your server is ready for validation testing. Do not proceed with the steps in
                                     ??? until after the operation of the server has been
                                     validated following the same methods as outlined in ???.
            -                        

      Example 4.1. Server: MASSIVE (PDC), File: /etc/samba/smb.conf

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      workgroup = MEGANET
      netbios name = MASSIVE
      interfaces = eth1, lo
      bind interfaces only = Yes
      passdb backend = tdbsam
      smb ports = 139
      add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -m '%u'
      delete user script = /usr/sbin/userdel -r '%u'
      add group script = /usr/sbin/groupadd '%g'
      delete group script = /usr/sbin/groupdel '%g'
      add user to group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -G '%g' '%u'
      add machine script = /usr/sbin/useradd -s /bin/false -d /var/lib/nobody '%u'
      preferred master = Yes
      wins support = Yes
      include = /etc/samba/dc-common.conf
      [accounts]
      comment = Accounting Files
      path = /data/accounts
      read only = No
      [service]
      comment = Financial Services Files
      path = /data/service
      read only = No
      [pidata]
      comment = Property Insurance Files
      path = /data/pidata
      read only = No

      Example 4.2. Server: MASSIVE (PDC), File: /etc/samba/dc-common.conf

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
      abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      logon home = \%L\%U
      domain logons = Yes
      preferred master = Yes
      include = /etc/samba/common.conf
      [homes]
      comment = Home Directories
      valid users = %S
      read only = No
      browseable = No
      [netlogon]
      comment = Network Logon Service
      path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
      guest ok = Yes
      locking = No
      [profiles]
      comment = Profile Share
      path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
      read only = No
      profile acls = Yes

      Example 4.3. Common Samba Configuration File: /etc/samba/common.conf

      [global]
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 50
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      time server = Yes
      printcap name = CUPS
      show add printer wizard = No
      shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
      abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
      utmp = Yes
      map acl inherit = Yes
      printing = cups
      veto files = /*.eml/*.nws/*.{*}/
      veto oplock files = /*.doc/*.xls/*.mdb/
      include =
      # Share and Service Definitions are common to all servers
      [printers]
      comment = SMB Print Spool
      path = /var/spool/samba
      guest ok = Yes
      printable = Yes
      use client driver = Yes
      default devmode = Yes
      browseable = No
      [apps]
      comment = Application Files
      path = /apps
      admin users = bjordan
      read only = No

      Example 4.4. Server: BLDG1 (Member), File: smb.conf

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      workgroup = MEGANET
      netbios name = BLDG1
      include = /etc/samba/dom-mem.conf

      Example 4.5. Server: BLDG2 (Member), File: smb.conf

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      workgroup = MEGANET
      netbios name = BLDG2
      include = /etc/samba/dom-mem.conf

      Example 4.6. Common Domain Member Include File: dom-mem.conf

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
      abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
      preferred master = Yes
      wins server = 172.16.0.1
      idmap uid = 15000-20000
      idmap gid = 15000-20000
      include = /etc/samba/common.conf

      Example 4.7. Server: MASSIVE, File: dhcpd.conf

      +                        

    Example 4.1. Server: MASSIVE (PDC), File: /etc/samba/smb.conf

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    workgroup = MEGANET
    netbios name = MASSIVE
    interfaces = eth1, lo
    bind interfaces only = Yes
    passdb backend = tdbsam
    smb ports = 139
    add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -m '%u'
    delete user script = /usr/sbin/userdel -r '%u'
    add group script = /usr/sbin/groupadd '%g'
    delete group script = /usr/sbin/groupdel '%g'
    add user to group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -G '%g' '%u'
    add machine script = /usr/sbin/useradd -s /bin/false -d /var/lib/nobody '%u'
    preferred master = Yes
    wins support = Yes
    include = /etc/samba/dc-common.conf
    [accounts]
    comment = Accounting Files
    path = /data/accounts
    read only = No
    [service]
    comment = Financial Services Files
    path = /data/service
    read only = No
    [pidata]
    comment = Property Insurance Files
    path = /data/pidata
    read only = No

    Example 4.2. Server: MASSIVE (PDC), File: /etc/samba/dc-common.conf

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
    abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
    logon script = scripts\logon.bat
    logon path = \%L\profiles\%U
    logon drive = X:
    logon home = \%L\%U
    domain logons = Yes
    preferred master = Yes
    include = /etc/samba/common.conf
    [homes]
    comment = Home Directories
    valid users = %S
    read only = No
    browseable = No
    [netlogon]
    comment = Network Logon Service
    path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
    guest ok = Yes
    locking = No
    [profiles]
    comment = Profile Share
    path = /var/lib/samba/profiles
    read only = No
    profile acls = Yes

    Example 4.3. Common Samba Configuration File: /etc/samba/common.conf

    [global]
    username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
    log level = 1
    syslog = 0
    log file = /var/log/samba/%m
    max log size = 50
    smb ports = 139
    name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
    time server = Yes
    printcap name = CUPS
    show add printer wizard = No
    shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
    abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
    utmp = Yes
    map acl inherit = Yes
    printing = cups
    veto files = /*.eml/*.nws/*.{*}/
    veto oplock files = /*.doc/*.xls/*.mdb/
    include =
    # Share and Service Definitions are common to all servers
    [printers]
    comment = SMB Print Spool
    path = /var/spool/samba
    guest ok = Yes
    printable = Yes
    use client driver = Yes
    default devmode = Yes
    browseable = No
    [apps]
    comment = Application Files
    path = /apps
    admin users = bjordan
    read only = No

    Example 4.4. Server: BLDG1 (Member), File: smb.conf

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    workgroup = MEGANET
    netbios name = BLDG1
    include = /etc/samba/dom-mem.conf

    Example 4.5. Server: BLDG2 (Member), File: smb.conf

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    workgroup = MEGANET
    netbios name = BLDG2
    include = /etc/samba/dom-mem.conf

    Example 4.6. Common Domain Member Include File: dom-mem.conf

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    shutdown script = /var/lib/samba/scripts/shutdown.sh
    abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
    preferred master = Yes
    wins server = 172.16.0.1
    idmap uid = 15000-20000
    idmap gid = 15000-20000
    include = /etc/samba/common.conf

    Example 4.7. Server: MASSIVE, File: dhcpd.conf

     # Abmas Accounting Inc.
     
     default-lease-time 86400;
    @@ -898,8 +898,8 @@
     net groupmap add ntgroup="Financial Services"  unixgroup=finsrvcs type=d
     net groupmap add ntgroup="Insurance Group"     unixgroup=piops type=d
     

    Process Startup Configuration

    - - + + There are two essential steps to process startup configuration. A process must be configured so that it is automatically restarted each time the server is rebooted. This step involves use of the chkconfig tool that @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ directories. Links are created so that when the system run-level is changed, the necessary start or kill script is run.

    - + In the event that a service is provided not as a daemon but via the internetworking super daemon (inetd or xinetd), then the chkconfig tool makes the necessary entries in the /etc/xinetd.d directory @@ -918,10 +918,10 @@ Last, each service must be started to permit system validation to proceed. The following steps are for a Red Hat Linux system, please adapt them to suit the target OS platform on which you are installing Samba. -

    Procedure 4.4. Process Startup Configuration Steps

    1. +

      Procedure 4.4. Process Startup Configuration Steps

      1. Use the standard system tool to configure each service to restart automatically at every system reboot. For example, - +

         root#  chkconfig dhpc on
         root#  chkconfig named on
        @@ -930,9 +930,9 @@
         root#  chkconfig swat on
         

      2. - - - + + + Now start each service to permit the system to be validated. Execute each of the following in the sequence shown: @@ -946,11 +946,11 @@

    Windows Client Configuration

    The procedure for desktop client configuration for the network in this chapter is similar to that used for the previous one. There are a few subtle changes that should be noted. -

    Procedure 4.5. Windows Client Configuration Steps

    1. +

      Procedure 4.5. Windows Client Configuration Steps

      1. Install MS Windows XP Professional. During installation, configure the client to use DHCP for TCP/IP protocol configuration. - - + + DHCP configures all Windows clients to use the WINS Server address that has been defined for the local subnet.

      2. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ also configure use of the identical printers that are located in the financial services department. Install printers on each machine using the following steps: -

        Procedure 4.6. Steps to Install Printer Drivers on Windows Clients

        1. +

          Procedure 4.6. Steps to Install Printer Drivers on Windows Clients

          1. Click Start->Settings->Printers+Add Printer+Next. Do not click Network printer. Ensure that Local printer is selected.

          2. @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ user, of course.

          3. Instruct all users to log onto the workstation using their assigned username and password. -

        Key Points Learned

        +

    Key Points Learned

    The network you have just deployed has been a valuable exercise in forced constraint. You have deployed a network that works well, although you may soon start to see performance problems, at which time the modifications demonstrated in ??? @@ -1054,33 +1054,33 @@ to resources on the domain member servers

  • The introduction of roaming profiles -

  • Questions and Answers

    -

    Questions and Answers

    +

    The example smb.conf files in this chapter make use of the include facility. How may I get to see what the actual working smb.conf settings are? -
    +
    Why does the include file common.conf have an empty include statement? -
    +
    I accept that the simplest configuration necessary to do the job is the best. The use of tdbsam passdb backend is much simpler than having to manage an LDAP-based ldapsam passdb backend. I tried using rsync to replicate the passdb.tdb, and it seems to work fine! So what is the problem? -
    +
    You are using DHCP Relay enabled on the routers as well as a local DHCP server. Will this cause a clash? -
    +
    How does the Windows client find the PDC? -
    +
    Why did you enable IP forwarding (routing) only on the server called MASSIVE? -
    +
    You did nothing special to implement roaming profiles. Why? -
    +
    On the domain member computers, you configured winbind in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. You did not configure any PAM settings. Is this an omission? -
    +
    You are starting SWAT up on this example but have not discussed that anywhere. Why did you do this? -
    +
    The domain controller has an auto-shutdown script. Isn't that dangerous? -

    +

    The example smb.conf files in this chapter make use of the include facility. How may I get to see what the actual working smb.conf settings are?

    @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@

     root#  testparm -s | less
     

    -

    +

    Why does the include file common.conf have an empty include statement?

    The use of the empty include statement nullifies further includes. For example, let's say you @@ -1101,7 +1101,7 @@ If the include parameter was not in the common.conf file, the final smb.conf file leaves the include in place, even though the file it points to has already been included. This is a bug that will be fixed at a future date. -

    +

    I accept that the simplest configuration necessary to do the job is the best. The use of tdbsam passdb backend is much simpler than having to manage an LDAP-based ldapsam passdb backend. I tried using rsync to replicate the passdb.tdb, and it seems to work fine! @@ -1111,7 +1111,7 @@ contents between the PDC and BDCs. The most notable symptom is that workstations may not be able to log onto the network following a reboot and may have to rejoin the domain to recover network access capability. -

    +

    You are using DHCP Relay enabled on the routers as well as a local DHCP server. Will this cause a clash?

    No. It is possible to have as many DHCP servers on a network segment as makes sense. A DHCP server @@ -1120,26 +1120,26 @@

    The only exception to this rule is when the client makes a directed request from a specific DHCP server for renewal of the lease it has. This means that under normal circumstances there is no risk of a clash. -

    +

    How does the Windows client find the PDC?

    The Windows client obtains the WINS server address from the DHCP lease information. It also obtains from the DHCP lease information the parameter that causes it to use directed UDP (UDP Unicast) to register itself with the WINS server and to obtain enumeration of vital network information to enable it to operate successfully. -

    +

    Why did you enable IP forwarding (routing) only on the server called MASSIVE?

    The server called MASSIVE is acting as a router to the Internet. No other server (BLDG1 or BLDG2) has any need for IP forwarding because they are attached only to their own network. Route table entries are needed to direct MASSIVE to send all traffic intended for the remote network segments to the router that is its gateway to them. -

    +

    You did nothing special to implement roaming profiles. Why?

    Unless configured to do otherwise, the default behavior with Samba-3 and Windows XP Professional clients is to use roaming profiles. -

    +

    On the domain member computers, you configured winbind in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. You did not configure any PAM settings. Is this an omission?

    @@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ member servers using Windows networking usernames and passwords, it is necessary to configure PAM to enable the use of winbind. Samba makes use only of the identity resolution facilities of the name service switch (NSS). -

    +

    You are starting SWAT up on this example but have not discussed that anywhere. Why did you do this?

    Oh, I did not think you would notice that. It is there so that it can be used. This is more fully discussed @@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ of smb.conf include files because SWAT optimizes them out into an aggregated file but leaves in place a broken reference to the top-layer include file. SWAT was not designed to handle this functionality gracefully. -

    +

    The domain controller has an auto-shutdown script. Isn't that dangerous?

    Well done, you spotted that! I guess it is dangerous. It is good to know that you can do this, though. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ch14.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ch14.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ch14.html 2006-01-29 10:18:16.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ch14.html 2006-07-06 05:19:11.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -Chapter 14. Samba Support

    Chapter 14. Samba Support

    - +Chapter 14. Samba Support

    Chapter 14. Samba Support

    + One of the most difficult to answer questions in the information technology industry is, “What is support?”. That question irritates some folks, as much as common answers may annoy others.

    - + The most aggravating situation pertaining to support is typified when, as a Linux user, a call is made to an Internet service provider who, instead of listening to the problem to find a solution, blandly replies: “Oh, Linux? We do not support Linux!”. It has happened to me, and similar situations happen @@ -15,50 +15,50 @@ at the right time, no matter the situation. Support is all that it takes to take away pain, disruption, inconvenience, loss of productivity, disorientation, uncertainty, and real or perceived risk.

    - - - + + + One of the forces that has become a driving force for the adoption of open source software is the fact that many IT businesses have provided services that have perhaps failed to deliver what the customer expected, or that have been found wanting for other reasons.

    - - + + In recognition of the need for needs satisfaction as the primary experience an information technology user or consumer expects, the information provided in this chapter may help someone to avoid an unpleasant experience in respect of problem resolution.

    - - - + + + In the open source software arena there are two support options: free support and paid-for (commercial) support. -

    Free Support

    - - - - - - +

    Free Support

    + + + + + + Free support may be obtained from friends, colleagues, user groups, mailing lists, and interactive help facilities. An example of an interactive dacility is the Internet relay chat (IRC) channels that host user supported mutual assistance.

    - - - - - + + + + + The Samba project maintains a mailing list that is commonly used to discuss solutions to Samba deployments. Information regarding subscription to the Samba mailing list can be found on the Samba web site. The public mailing list that can be used to obtain free, user contributed, support is called the samba list. The email address for this list is at mail:samba@samba.org. Information regarding the Samba IRC channels may be found on the Samba IRC web page.

    - - - - + + + + As a general rule, it is considered poor net behavior to contact a Samba Team member directly for free support. Most active members of the Samba Team work exceptionally long hours to assist users who have demonstrated a qualified problem. Some team members may respond to direct email @@ -66,9 +66,9 @@ Team members actually provide professional paid-for Samba support and it is therefore wise to show appropriate discretion and reservation in all direct contact.

    - - - + + + When you stumble across a Samba bug, often the quickest way to get it resolved is by posting a bug report. All such reports are mailed to the responsible code maintainer for action. The better the report, and the more serious it is, @@ -76,16 +76,16 @@ the reported bug it is likely to be rejected. It is up to you to provide sufficient information that will permit the problem to be reproduced.

    - + We all recognize that sometimes free support does not provide the answer that is sought within the time-frame required. At other times the problem is elusive and you may lack the experience necessary to isolate the problem and thus to resolve it. This is a situation where is may be prudent to purchase paid-for support. -

    Commercial Support

    +

    Commercial Support

    There are six basic support oriented services that are most commonly sought by Samba sites:

    • Assistance with network design

    • Staff Training

    • Assistance with Samba network deployment and installation

    • Priority telephone or email Samba configuration assistance

    • Trouble-shooting and diagnostic assistance

    • Provision of quality assured ready-to-install Samba binary packages

    - - + + Information regarding companies that provide professional Samba support can be obtained by performing a Google search, as well as by reference to the Samba Support web page. Companies who notify the Samba Team that they provide commercial support are given a free listing that is sorted by the country of origin. @@ -93,13 +93,13 @@ provider and to satisfy yourself that both the company and its staff are able to deliver what is required of them.

    - + The policy within the Samba Team is to treat all commercial support providers equally and to show no preference. As a result, Samba Team members who provide commercial support are lumped in with everyone else. You are encouraged to obtain the services needed from a company in your local area. The open source movement is pro-community; so do what you can to help a local business to prosper.

    - + Open source software support can be found in any quality, at any price and in any place you can to obtain it. Over 180 companies around the world provide Samba support, there is no excuse for suffering in the mistaken belief that Samba is unsupported software it is supported. diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DMSMig.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DMSMig.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DMSMig.html 2006-01-29 10:18:14.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DMSMig.html 2006-07-06 05:19:09.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Part II. Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    +Part II. Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    Domain Members, Updating Samba and Migration

    This section Samba-3 by Example covers two main topics: How to add Samba Domain Member Servers and Samba Domain Member Clients to a Samba domain, the other subject is that of how to migrate from and NT4 Domain, a NetWare server, or from an earlier @@ -7,4 +7,4 @@ Those who are making use of the chapter on Adding UNIX clients and servers running Samba to a Samba or a Windows networking domain may also benefit by referring to the book The Official Samba-3 HOWTO and Reference Guide. -

    +

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DomApps.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DomApps.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DomApps.html 2006-01-29 10:18:15.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/DomApps.html 2006-07-06 05:19:10.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -Chapter 12. Integrating Additional Services

    Chapter 12. Integrating Additional Services

    - - - - - +Chapter 12. Integrating Additional Services

    Chapter 12. Integrating Additional Services

    + + + + + You've come a long way now. You have pretty much mastered Samba-3 for most uses it can be put to. Up until now, you have cast Samba-3 in the leading role, and where authentication was required, you have used one or another of @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ implementing Samba and Samba-supported services in a domain controlled by the latest Windows authentication technologies. Let's get started this is leading edge. -

    Introduction

    +

    Introduction

    Abmas has continued its miraculous growth; indeed, nothing seems to be able to stop its diversification into multiple (and seemingly unrelated) fields. Its latest acquisition is Abmas Snack Foods, a big player in the snack-food @@ -30,17 +30,17 @@ You have decided to set the ball rolling by introducing Samba-3 into the network gradually, taking over key services and easing the way to a full migration and, therefore, integration into Abmas's existing business later. -

    Assignment Tasks

    - - +

    Assignment Tasks

    + + You've promised the skeptical Abmas Snack Foods management team that you can show them how Samba can ease itself and other Open Source technologies into their existing infrastructure and deliver sound business advantages. Cost cutting is high on their agenda (a major promise of the acquisition). You have chosen Web proxying and caching as your proving ground.

    - - + + Abmas Snack Foods has several thousand users housed at its head office and multiple regional offices, plants, and warehouses. A high proportion of the business's work is done online, so Internet access for most of these @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ the team soon discovered proxying and caching. In fact, they became one of the earliest commercial users of Microsoft ISA.

    - - - + + + The team is not happy with ISA. Because it never lived up to its marketing promises, it underperformed and had reliability problems. You have pounced on the opportunity to show what Open Source can do. The one thing they do like, however, is ISA's @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@

    This is a hands-on exercise. You build software applications so that you obtain the functionality Abmas needs. -

    Dissection and Discussion

    +

    Dissection and Discussion

    The key requirements in this business example are straightforward. You are not required to do anything new, just to replicate an existing system, not lose any existing features, and improve performance. The key points are: @@ -73,20 +73,20 @@ Distributed system to accommodate load and geographical distribution of users

  • Seamless and transparent interoperability with the existing Active Directory domain -

  • Technical Issues

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - +

    Technical Issues

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + Functionally, the user's Internet Explorer requests a browsing session with the Squid proxy, for which it offers its AD authentication token. Squid hands off the authentication request to the Samba-3 authentication helper application @@ -107,25 +107,25 @@ Configuring, compiling, and then installing the supporting Samba-3 components

  • Tying it all together -

  • Political Issues

    +

    Political Issues

    You are a stranger in a strange land, and all eyes are upon you. Some would even like to see you fail. For you to gain the trust of your newly acquired IT people, it is essential that your solution does everything the old one did, but does it better in every way. Only then will the entrenched positions consider taking up your new way of doing things on a wider scale. -

    Implementation

    - +

    Implementation

    + First, your system needs to be prepared and in a known good state to proceed. This consists of making sure that everything the system depends on is present and that everything that could interfere or conflict with the system is removed. You will be configuring the Squid and Samba-3 packages and updating them if necessary. If conflicting packages of these programs are installed, they must be removed.

    - + The following packages should be available on your Red Hat Linux system:

    • - - + + krb5-libs

    • krb5-devel @@ -136,14 +136,14 @@

    • pam_krb5

    - + In the case of SUSE Linux, these packages are called:

    • heimdal-lib

    • heimdal-devel

    • - + heimdal

    • pam_krb5 @@ -152,26 +152,26 @@ them from the vendor's installation media. Follow the administrative guide for your Linux system to ensure that the packages are correctly updated.

      Note

      - - - + + + If the requirement is for interoperation with MS Windows Server 2003, it will be necessary to ensure that you are using MIT Kerberos version 1.3.1 or later. Red Hat Linux 9 ships with MIT Kerberos 1.2.7 and thus requires updating.

      - - + + Heimdal 0.6 or later is required in the case of SUSE Linux. SUSE Enterprise Linux Server 8 ships with Heimdal 0.4. SUSE 9 ships with the necessary version.

      Removal of Pre-Existing Conflicting RPMs

      - + If Samba and/or Squid RPMs are installed, they should be updated. You can build both from source.

      - - - + + + Locating the packages to be un-installed can be achieved by running:

       root#  rpm -qa | grep -i samba
      @@ -181,11 +181,11 @@
       

       root#  rpm -e samba-common
       

      -

      Kerberos Configuration

      - - - - +

      Kerberos Configuration

      + + + + The systems Kerberos installation must be configured to communicate with your primary Active Directory server (ADS KDC).

      @@ -193,13 +193,13 @@ although the current default Red Hat MIT version 1.2.7 gives acceptable results unless you are using Windows 2003 servers.

      - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Officially, neither MIT (1.3.4) nor Heimdal (0.63) Kerberos needs an /etc/krb5.conf file in order to work correctly. All ADS domains automatically create SRV records in the DNS zone Kerberos.REALM.NAME for each KDC in the realm. Since both @@ -207,25 +207,25 @@ automatically find the KDCs. In addition, krb5.conf allows specifying only a single KDC, even if there is more than one. Using the DNS lookup allows the KRB5 libraries to use whichever KDCs are available. -

      Procedure 12.1. Kerberos Configuration Steps

      1. - +

        Procedure 12.1. Kerberos Configuration Steps

        1. + If you find the need to manually configure the krb5.conf, you should edit it to have the contents shown in ???. The final fully qualified path for this file should be /etc/krb5.conf.

        2. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + The following gotchas often catch people out. Kerberos is case sensitive. Your realm must be in UPPERCASE, or you will get an error: “Cannot find KDC for requested realm while getting initial credentials”. Kerberos is picky about time synchronization. The time @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ NetBIOS name. If Kerberos cannot do this reverse lookup, you will get a local error when you try to join the realm.

        3. - + You are now ready to test your installation by issuing the command:

           root#  kinit [USERNAME@REALM]
          @@ -261,29 +261,29 @@
           	LONDON.ABMAS.BIZ = {
           	kdc = w2k3s.london.abmas.biz
           	}
          -

        +

      The command

       root#  klist -e 
       

      shows the Kerberos tickets cached by the system. -

      Samba Configuration

      - +

      Samba Configuration

      + Samba must be configured to correctly use Active Directory. Samba-3 must be used, since it has the necessary components to interface with Active Directory. -

      Procedure 12.2. Securing Samba-3 With ADS Support Steps

      1. - - - - - +

        Procedure 12.2. Securing Samba-3 With ADS Support Steps

        1. + + + + + Download the latest stable Samba-3 for Red Hat Linux from the official Samba Team FTP site. The official Samba Team RPMs for Red Hat Fedora Linux contain the ntlm_auth tool needed, and are linked against MIT KRB5 version 1.3.1 and therefore are ready for use.

          - - + + The necessary, validated RPM packages for SUSE Linux may be obtained from the SerNet FTP site that is located in Germany. All SerNet RPMs are validated, have the necessary @@ -293,11 +293,11 @@ Using your favorite editor, change the /etc/samba/smb.conf file so it has contents similar to the example shown in ???.

        2. - - - i - - + + + i + + Next you need to create a computer account in the Active Directory. This sets up the trust relationship needed for other clients to authenticate to the Samba server with an Active Directory Kerberos ticket. @@ -307,11 +307,11 @@ root# net ads join -U administrator%vulcon

        3. - - - - - + + + + + Your new Samba binaries must be started in the standard manner as is applicable to the platform you are running on. Alternatively, start your Active Directory-enabled Samba with the following commands:

          @@ -320,11 +320,11 @@
           root#  winbindd -B
           

        4. - - - - - + + + + + We now need to test that Samba is communicating with the Active Directory domain; most specifically, we want to see whether winbind is enumerating users and groups. Issue the following commands: @@ -357,8 +357,8 @@

          This enumerates all the groups in your Active Directory tree.

        5. - - + + Squid uses the ntlm_auth helper build with Samba-3. You may test ntlm_auth with the command:

          @@ -370,14 +370,14 @@
           root#  NT_STATUS_OK: Success (0x0)
           

        6. - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + The ntlm_auth helper, when run from a command line as the user “root”, authenticates against your Active Directory domain (with the aid of winbind). It manages this by reading from the winbind privileged pipe. @@ -395,37 +395,37 @@ root# chgrp squid /var/lib/samba/winbindd_privileged root# chmod 750 /var/lib/samba/winbindd_privileged

          -

      NSS Configuration

      - - - +

    NSS Configuration

    + + + For Squid to benefit from Samba-3, NSS must be updated to allow winbind as a valid route to user authentication.

    Edit your /etc/nsswitch.conf file so it has the parameters shown in ???. -

    Example 12.2. Samba Configuration File: /etc/samba/smb.conf

    [global]
    workgroup = LONDON
    netbios name = W2K3S
    realm = LONDON.ABMAS.BIZ
    security = ads
    encrypt passwords = yes
    password server = w2k3s.london.abmas.biz
    # separate domain and username with '/', like DOMAIN/username
    winbind separator = /
    # use UIDs from 10000 to 20000 for domain users
    idmap uid = 10000-20000
    # use GIDs from 10000 to 20000 for domain groups
    idmap gid = 10000-20000
    # allow enumeration of winbind users and groups
    winbind enum users = yes
    winbind enum groups = yes
    winbind user default domain = yes

    Example 12.3. NSS Configuration File Extract File: /etc/nsswitch.conf

    +	

    Example 12.2. Samba Configuration File: /etc/samba/smb.conf

    [global]
    workgroup = LONDON
    netbios name = W2K3S
    realm = LONDON.ABMAS.BIZ
    security = ads
    encrypt passwords = yes
    password server = w2k3s.london.abmas.biz
    # separate domain and username with '/', like DOMAIN/username
    winbind separator = /
    # use UIDs from 10000 to 20000 for domain users
    idmap uid = 10000-20000
    # use GIDs from 10000 to 20000 for domain groups
    idmap gid = 10000-20000
    # allow enumeration of winbind users and groups
    winbind enum users = yes
    winbind enum groups = yes
    winbind user default domain = yes

    Example 12.3. NSS Configuration File Extract File: /etc/nsswitch.conf

     passwd: files winbind
     shadow: files
     group: files winbind
    -

    Squid Configuration

    - - +

    Squid Configuration

    + + Squid must be configured correctly to interact with the Samba-3 components that handle Active Directory authentication. -

    Configuration

    Procedure 12.3. Squid Configuration Steps

    1. - - - +

    Configuration

    Procedure 12.3. Squid Configuration Steps

    1. + + + If your Linux distribution is SUSE Linux 9, the version of Squid supplied is already enabled to use the winbind helper agent. You can therefore omit the steps that would build the Squid binary programs.

    2. - - - - - + + + + + Squid, by default, runs as the user nobody. You need to add a system user squid and a system group squid if they are not set up already (if the default @@ -433,16 +433,16 @@ squid user in /etc/passwd and a squid group in /etc/group if these aren't there already.

    3. - - + + You now need to change the permissions on Squid's var directory. Enter the following command:

       root#  chown -R squid /var/cache/squid
       

    4. - - + + Squid must also have control over its logging. Enter the following commands:

       root#  chown -R chown squid:squid /var/log/squid
      @@ -456,11 +456,11 @@
       root#  chmod 770 /var/cache/squid
       

    5. - + The /etc/squid/squid.conf file must be edited to include the lines from ??? and ???.

    6. - + You must create Squid's cache directories before it may be run. Enter the following command:

       root#  squid -z
      @@ -487,23 +487,23 @@
       	auth_param basic credentialsttl 2 hours
       	acl AuthorizedUsers proxy_auth REQUIRED
       	http_access allow all AuthorizedUsers
      -

    Key Points Learned

    - - - - - +

    Key Points Learned

    + + + + + Microsoft Windows networking protocols permeate the spectrum of technologies that Microsoft Windows clients use, even when accessing traditional services such as Web browsers. Depending on whom you discuss this with, this is either good or bad. No matter how you might evaluate this, the use of NTLMSSP as the authentication protocol for Web proxy access has some advantages over the cookie-based authentication regime used by all competing browsers. It is Samba's implementation of NTLMSSP that makes it attractive to implement the solution that has been demonstrated in this chapter. -

    Questions and Answers

    - - - - +

    Questions and Answers

    + + + + The development of the ntlm_auth module was first discussed in many Open Source circles in 2002. At the SambaXP conference in Goettingen, Germany, Mr. Francesco Chemolli demonstrated the use of ntlm_auth during one of the late developer meetings that took place. Since that time, the @@ -522,34 +522,34 @@ You would be well-advised to recognize that all cache-intensive proxying solutions demand a lot of memory. Make certain that your Squid proxy server is equipped with sufficient memory to permit all proxy operations to run out of memory without invoking the overheads involved in the use of memory that has to be swapped to disk. -

    +

    What does Samba have to do with Web proxy serving? -
    +
    What other services does Samba provide? -
    +
    Does use of Samba (ntlm_auth) improve the performance of Squid? -

    +

    What does Samba have to do with Web proxy serving?

    - - - - - + + + + + To provide transparent interoperability between Windows clients and the network services that are used from them, Samba had to develop tools and facilities that deliver that feature. The benefit of Open Source software is that it can readily be reused. The current ntlm_auth module is basically a wrapper around authentication code from the core of the Samba project.

    - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + The ntlm_auth module supports basic plain-text authentication and NTLMSSP protocols. This module makes it possible for Web and FTP proxy requests to be authenticated without the user being interrupted via his or her Windows logon credentials. This facility is available with @@ -557,36 +557,36 @@ There are a few open source initiatives to provide support for these protocols in the Apache Web server also.

    - + The short answer is that by adding a wrapper around key authentication components of Samba, other projects (like Squid) can benefit from the labors expended in meeting user interoperability needs. -

    +

    What other services does Samba provide?

    - - - - - + + + + + Samba-3 is a file and print server. The core components that provide this functionality are smbd, nmbd, and the identity resolver daemon, winbindd.

    - - + + Samba-3 is an SMB/CIFS client. The core component that provides this is called smbclient.

    - - - - - + + + + + Samba-3 includes a number of helper tools, plug-in modules, utilities, and test and validation facilities. Samba-3 includes glue modules that help provide interoperability between MS Windows clients and UNIX/Linux servers and clients. It includes Winbind agents that make it possible to authenticate UNIX/Linux access attempts as well as logins to an SMB/CIFS authentication server backend. Samba-3 includes name service switch (NSS) modules to permit identity resolution via SMB/CIFS servers (Windows NT4/200x, Samba, and a host of other commercial server products). -

    +

    Does use of Samba (ntlm_auth) improve the performance of Squid?

    Not really. Samba's ntlm_auth module handles only authentication. It requires that diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ExNetworks.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ExNetworks.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ExNetworks.html 2006-01-29 10:18:12.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/ExNetworks.html 2006-07-06 05:19:06.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Part I. Example Network Configurations

    Example Network Configurations

    Example Network Configurations

    +Part I. Example Network Configurations

    Example Network Configurations

    Example Network Configurations

    This section of Samba-3 by Example provides example network configurations that can be copied, or modified as needed, and deployed as-is.

    @@ -19,4 +19,4 @@ commercial support options may be obtained from the commercial support pages from the Samba web site. -

    Table of Contents

    1. No-Frills Samba Servers
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Drafting Office
    Charity Administration Office
    Accounting Office
    Questions and Answers
    2. Small Office Networking
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Validation
    Notebook Computers: A Special Case
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    3. Secure Office Networking
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Basic System Configuration
    Samba Configuration
    Configuration of DHCP and DNS Servers
    Printer Configuration
    Process Startup Configuration
    Validation
    Application Share Configuration
    Windows Client Configuration
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    4. The 500-User Office
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Installation of DHCP, DNS, and Samba Control Files
    Server Preparation: All Servers
    Server-Specific Preparation
    Process Startup Configuration
    Windows Client Configuration
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    5. Making Happy Users
    Regarding LDAP Directories and Windows Computer Accounts
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Installation Checklist
    Samba Server Implementation
    OpenLDAP Server Configuration
    PAM and NSS Client Configuration
    Samba-3 PDC Configuration
    Install and Configure Idealx smbldap-tools Scripts
    LDAP Initialization and Creation of User and Group Accounts
    Printer Configuration
    Samba-3 BDC Configuration
    Miscellaneous Server Preparation Tasks
    Configuring Directory Share Point Roots
    Configuring Profile Directories
    Preparation of Logon Scripts
    Assigning User Rights and Privileges
    Windows Client Configuration
    Configuration of Default Profile with Folder Redirection
    Configuration of MS Outlook to Relocate PST File
    Configure Delete Cached Profiles on Logout
    Uploading Printer Drivers to Samba Servers
    Software Installation
    Roll-out Image Creation
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    6. A Distributed 2000-User Network
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    +

    Table of Contents

    1. No-Frills Samba Servers
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Drafting Office
    Charity Administration Office
    Accounting Office
    Questions and Answers
    2. Small Office Networking
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Validation
    Notebook Computers: A Special Case
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    3. Secure Office Networking
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Basic System Configuration
    Samba Configuration
    Configuration of DHCP and DNS Servers
    Printer Configuration
    Process Startup Configuration
    Validation
    Application Share Configuration
    Windows Client Configuration
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    4. The 500-User Office
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Installation of DHCP, DNS, and Samba Control Files
    Server Preparation: All Servers
    Server-Specific Preparation
    Process Startup Configuration
    Windows Client Configuration
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    5. Making Happy Users
    Regarding LDAP Directories and Windows Computer Accounts
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Installation Checklist
    Samba Server Implementation
    OpenLDAP Server Configuration
    PAM and NSS Client Configuration
    Samba-3 PDC Configuration
    Install and Configure Idealx smbldap-tools Scripts
    LDAP Initialization and Creation of User and Group Accounts
    Printer Configuration
    Samba-3 BDC Configuration
    Miscellaneous Server Preparation Tasks
    Configuring Directory Share Point Roots
    Configuring Profile Directories
    Preparation of Logon Scripts
    Assigning User Rights and Privileges
    Windows Client Configuration
    Configuration of Default Profile with Folder Redirection
    Configuration of MS Outlook to Relocate PST File
    Configure Delete Cached Profiles on Logout
    Uploading Printer Drivers to Samba Servers
    Software Installation
    Roll-out Image Creation
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    6. A Distributed 2000-User Network
    Introduction
    Assignment Tasks
    Dissection and Discussion
    Technical Issues
    Political Issues
    Implementation
    Key Points Learned
    Questions and Answers
    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/go01.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/go01.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/go01.html 2006-01-29 10:18:18.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/go01.html 2006-07-06 05:19:13.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Glossary

    Glossary

    Access Control List

    +Glossary

    Glossary

    Access Control List

    A detailed list of permissions granted to users or groups with respect to file and network resource access.

    Active Directory Service

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/gpl.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/gpl.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/gpl.html 2006-01-29 10:18:18.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/gpl.html 2006-07-06 05:19:13.000000000 -0500 @@ -289,6 +289,6 @@ This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the - library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General + library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.

    diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/HA.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/HA.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/HA.html 2006-01-29 10:18:16.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/HA.html 2006-07-06 05:19:10.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -Chapter 13. Performance, Reliability, and Availability

    Chapter 13. Performance, Reliability, and Availability

    - - - +Chapter 13. Performance, Reliability, and Availability

    Chapter 13. Performance, Reliability, and Availability

    + + + Well, you have reached one of the last chapters of this book. It is customary to attempt to wrap up the theme and contents of a book in what is generally regarded as the chapter that should draw conclusions. This book is a suspense thriller, and since @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ regarding some of the things everyone can do to deliver a reliable Samba-3 network.

     

    In a world so full of noise, how can the sparrow be heard? -

     
     --Anonymous

    Introduction

    - +

     
     --Anonymous

    Introduction

    + The sparrow is a small bird whose sounds are drowned out by the noise of the busy world it lives in. Likewise, the simple steps that can be taken to improve the reliability and availability of a Samba network are often drowned out by the volume @@ -20,22 +20,22 @@ itself to discussion of clustering because each clustering methodology uses its own custom tools and methods. Only passing comments are offered concerning these methods.

    - - - + + + A search for “samba cluster” produced 71,600 hits. And a search for “highly available samba” and “highly available windows” produced an amazing number of references. It is clear from the resources on the Internet that Windows file and print services availability, reliability, and scalability are of vital interest to corporate network users.

    - + So without further background, you can review a checklist of simple steps that can be taken to ensure acceptable network performance while keeping costs of ownership well under control. -

    Dissection and Discussion

    - - +

    Dissection and Discussion

    + + If it is your purpose to get the best mileage out of your Samba servers, there is one rule that must be obeyed. If you want the best, keep your implementation as simple as possible. You may well be forced to introduce some complexities, but you should do so only as a last resort. @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ make life easier for your successor. Simple implementations can be more readily audited than can complex ones.

    - - + + Problems reported by users fall into three categories: configurations that do not work, those that have broken behavior, and poor performance. The term broken behavior means that the function of a particular Samba component appears to work sometimes, but not at @@ -54,12 +54,12 @@ list of Windows machines in MS Explorer changes, sometimes listing machines that are running and at other times not listing them even though the machines are in use on the network.

    - - - - - - + + + + + + A significant number of reports concern problems with the smbfs file system driver that is part of the Linux kernel, not part of Samba. Users continue to interpret that smbfs is part of Samba, simply because Samba includes the front-end tools @@ -70,32 +70,32 @@ common infrastructure with some Samba components, but they are not maintained as part of Samba and are really foreign to it.

    - + The new project, cifsfs, is destined to replace smbfs. It, too, is not part of Samba, even though one of the Samba Team members is a prime mover in this project.

    Table 13.1 lists typical causes of:

    • Not Working (NW)

    • Broken Behavior (BB)

    • Poor Performance (PP)

    Table 13.1. Effect of Common Problems

    Problem

    NW

    BB

    PP

    File locking

    -

    X

    -

    Hardware problems

    X

    X

    X

    Incorrect authentication

    X

    X

    -

    Incorrect configuration

    X

    X

    X

    LDAP problems

    X

    X

    -

    Name resolution

    X

    X

    X

    Printing problems

    X

    X

    -

    Slow file transfer

    -

    -

    X

    Winbind problems

    X

    X

    -

    - + It is obvious to all that the first requirement (as a matter of network hygiene) is to eliminate problems that affect basic network operation. This book has provided sufficient working examples to help you to avoid all these problems. -

    Guidelines for Reliable Samba Operation

    - - +

    Guidelines for Reliable Samba Operation

    + + Your objective is to provide a network that works correctly, can grow at all times, is resilient at times of extreme demand, and can scale to meet future needs. The following subject areas provide pointers that can help you today. -

    Name Resolution

    +

    Name Resolution

    There are three basic current problem areas: bad hostnames, routed networks, and network collisions. These are covered in the following discussion. -

    Bad Hostnames

    - - - - - +

    Bad Hostnames

    + + + + + When configured as a DHCP client, a number of Linux distributions set the system hostname to localhost. If the parameter netbios name is not specified to something other than localhost, the Samba server appears @@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ the local Windows machine itself. Hostnames must be valid for Windows networking to function correctly.

    - + A few sites have tried to name Windows clients and Samba servers with a name that begins with the digits 1-9. This does not work either because it may result in the client or server attempting to use that name as an IP address.

    - - + + A Samba server called FRED in a NetBIOS domain called COLLISION in a network environment that is part of the fully-qualified Internet domain namespace known as parrots.com, results in DNS name lookups for fred.parrots.com @@ -122,49 +122,49 @@ attempts to resolve fred.parrots.com.parrots.com, which most likely fails given that you probably do not have this in your DNS namespace.

    Note

    - - - + + + An Active Directory realm called collision.parrots.com is perfectly okay, although it too must be capable of being resolved via DNS, something that functions correctly if Windows 200x ADS has been properly installed and configured. -

    Routed Networks

    - - - +

    Routed Networks

    + + + NetBIOS networks (Windows networking with NetBIOS over TCP/IP enabled) makes extensive use of UDP-based broadcast traffic, as you saw during the exercises in ???.

    - - - + + + UDP broadcast traffic is not forwarded by routers. This means that NetBIOS broadcast-based networking cannot function across routed networks (i.e., multi-subnet networks) unless special provisions are made:

    • - - - + + + Either install on every Windows client an LMHOSTS file (located in the directory C:\windows\system32\drivers\etc). It is also necessary to add to the Samba server smb.conf file the parameters remote announce and remote browse sync. For more information, refer to the online manual page for the smb.conf file.

    • - + Or configure Samba as a WINS server, and configure all network clients to use that WINS server in their TCP/IP configuration.

    Note

    - - + + The use of DNS is not an acceptable substitute for WINS. DNS does not store specific information regarding NetBIOS networking particulars that get stored in the WINS name resolution database and that Windows clients require and depend on. -

    Network Collisions

    - - - - +

    Network Collisions

    + + + + Excessive network activity causes NetBIOS network timeouts. Timeouts may result in blue screen of death (BSOD) experiences. High collision rates may be caused by excessive UDP broadcast activity, by defective networking hardware, or through excessive network @@ -173,9 +173,9 @@ The use of WINS is highly recommended to reduce network broadcast traffic, as outlined in ???.

    - - - + + + Under no circumstances should the facility be supported by many routers, known as NetBIOS forwarding, unless you know exactly what you are doing. Inappropriate use of this facility can result in UDP broadcast storms. In one case in 1999, a university network became @@ -183,13 +183,13 @@ testing of a Samba server. The maximum throughput on a 100-Base-T (100 MB/sec) network was less than 15 KB/sec. After the NetBIOS forwarding was turned off, file transfer performance immediately returned to 11 MB/sec. -

    Samba Configuration

    +

    Samba Configuration

    As a general rule, the contents of the smb.conf file should be kept as simple as possible. No parameter should be specified unless you know it is essential to operation.

    - - - + + + Many UNIX administrators like to fully document the settings in the smb.conf file. This is a bad idea because it adds content to the file. The smb.conf file is re-read by every smbd process every time the file timestamp changes (or, on systems where this does not work, every 20 seconds or so). @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ As the size of the smb.conf file grows, the risk of introducing parsing errors also increases. It is recommended to keep a fully documented smb.conf file on hand, and then to operate Samba only with an optimized file. -

    +

    The preferred way to maintain a documented file is to call it something like smb.conf.master. You can generate the optimized file by executing:

    @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@
     Server role: ROLE_DOMAIN_PDC
     Press enter to see a dump of your service definitions
     

    - + You now, of course, press the enter key to complete the command, or else abort it by pressing Ctrl-C. The important thing to note is the noted Server role, as well as warning messages. Noted configuration conflicts must be remedied before proceeding. For example, the following error message represents a @@ -233,28 +233,28 @@ cannot be set in the smb.conf file. nmbd will abort with this setting.

    - - - + + + There are two parameters that can cause severe network performance degradation: socket options and socket address. The socket options parameter was often necessary when Samba was used with the Linux 2.2.x kernels. Later kernels are largely self-tuning and seldom benefit from this parameter being set. Do not use either parameter unless it has been proven necessary to use them.

    - - - - + + + + Another smb.conf parameter that may cause severe network performance degradation is the strict sync parameter. Do not use this at all. There is no good reason to use this with any modern Windows client. The strict sync is often used with the sync always parameter. This, too, can severely degrade network performance, so do not set it; if you must, do so with caution.

    - - - - + + + + Finally, many network administrators deliberately disable opportunistic locking support. While this does not degrade Samba performance, it significantly degrades Windows client performance because this disables local file caching on Windows clients and forces every file read and written to @@ -262,12 +262,12 @@ support, do so only on the share on which it is required. That way, all other shares can provide oplock support for operations that are tolerant of it. See ??? for more information. -

    Use and Location of BDCs

    - - - - - +

    Use and Location of BDCs

    + + + + + On a network segment where there is a PDC and a BDC, the BDC carries the bulk of the network logon processing. If the BDC is a heavily loaded server, the PDC carries a greater proportion of authentication and logon processing. When a sole BDC on a routed network segment gets heavily @@ -275,13 +275,13 @@ to a BDC on a distant network segment. This significantly hinders WAN operations and is undesirable.

    - - + + As a general guide, instead of adding domain member servers to a network, you would be better advised to add BDCs until there are fewer than 30 Windows clients per BDC. Beyond that ratio, you should add domain member servers. This practice ensures that there are always sufficient domain controllers to handle logon requests and authentication traffic. -

    Use One Consistent Version of MS Windows Client

    +

    Use One Consistent Version of MS Windows Client

    Every network client has its own peculiarities. From a management perspective, it is easier to deal with one version of MS Windows that is maintained to a consistent update level than it is to deal with a mixture of clients. @@ -289,61 +289,61 @@ On a number of occasions, particular Microsoft service pack updates of a Windows server or client have necessitated special handling from the Samba server end. If you want to remain sane, keep you client workstation configurations consistent. -

    For Scalability, Use SAN-Based Storage on Samba Servers

    - - +

    For Scalability, Use SAN-Based Storage on Samba Servers

    + + Many SAN-based storage systems permit more than one server to share a common data store. Use of a shared SAN data store means that you do not need to use time- and resource-hungry data synchronization techniques.

    - - + + The use of a collection of relatively low-cost front-end Samba servers that are coupled to a shared backend SAN data store permits load distribution while containing costs below that of installing and managing a complex clustering facility. -

    Distribute Network Load with MSDFS

    - - +

    Distribute Network Load with MSDFS

    + + Microsoft DFS (distributed file system) technology has been implemented in Samba. MSDFS permits data to be accessed from a single share and yet to actually be distributed across multiple actual servers. Refer to TOSHARG2, Chapter 19, for information regarding implementation of an MSDFS installation.

    - - + + The combination of multiple backend servers together with a front-end server and use of MSDFS can achieve almost the same as you would obtain with a clustered Samba server. -

    Replicate Data to Conserve Peak-Demand Wide-Area Bandwidth

    - - - +

    Replicate Data to Conserve Peak-Demand Wide-Area Bandwidth

    + + + Consider using rsync to replicate data across the WAN during times of low utilization. Users can then access the replicated data store rather than needing to do so across the WAN. This works best for read-only data, but with careful planning can be implemented so that modified files get replicated back to the point of origin. Be careful with your implementation if you choose to permit modification and return replication of the modified file; otherwise, you may inadvertently overwrite important data. -

    Hardware Problems

    - - - - - - +

    Hardware Problems

    + + + + + + Networking hardware prices have fallen sharply over the past 5 years. A surprising number of Samba networking problems over this time have been traced to defective network interface cards (NICs) or defective HUBs, switches, and cables.

    - + Not surprising is the fact that network administrators do not like to be shown to have made a bad decision. Money saved in buying low-cost hardware may result in high costs incurred in corrective action.

    - - - - - + + + + + Defective NICs, HUBs, and switches may appear as intermittent network access problems, intermittent or persistent data corruption, slow network throughput, low performance, or even as BSOD problems with MS Windows clients. In one case, a company updated several workstations with newer, faster @@ -352,14 +352,14 @@

    Defective hardware problems may take patience and persistence before the real cause can be discovered.

    - + Networking hardware defects can significantly impact perceived Samba performance, but defective RAID controllers as well as SCSI and IDE hard disk controllers have also been known to impair Samba server operations. One business came to this realization only after replacing a Samba installation with MS Windows Server 2000 running on the same hardware. The root of the problem completely eluded the network administrator until the entire server was replaced. While you may well think that this would never happen to you, experience shows that given the right (unfortunate) circumstances, this can happen to anyone. -

    Large Directories

    +

    Large Directories

    There exist applications that create or manage directories containing many thousands of files. Such applications typically generate many small files (less than 100 KB). At the best of times, under UNIX, listing of the files in a directory that contains many files is slow. By default, Windows NT, 200x, @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ that the file system is on will be thrashing wildly.

    Samba-3.0.12 and later, includes new code that radically improves Samba perfomance. The secret to this is - really in the case sensitive = True line. This tells smbd never to scan + really in the case sensitive = True line. This tells smbd never to scan for case-insensitive versions of names. So if an application asks for a file called FOO, and it can not be found by a simple stat call, then smbd will return "file not found" immediately without scanning the containing directory for a version of a different case. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ All files and directories under the path directory must be in the same case as specified in the smb.conf stanza. This means that smbd will not be able to find lower case filenames with these settings. Note, this is done on a per-share basis. -

    Key Points Learned

    +

    Key Points Learned

    This chapter has touched in broad sweeps on a number of simple steps that can be taken to ensure that your Samba network is resilient, scalable, and reliable, and that it performs well. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ In the long term, that may not be you. Spare a thought for your successor and give him or her an even break.

    - + Last, but not least, you should not only keep the network design simple, but also be sure it is well documented. This book may serve as your pattern for documenting every aspect of your design, its implementation, and particularly the objects and assumptions diff -u -r --new-file --exclude .svn --exclude CVS samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/happy.html samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/happy.html --- samba-3.0.22/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/happy.html 2006-01-29 10:18:11.000000000 -0600 +++ samba-3.0.23/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-ByExample/happy.html 2006-07-06 05:19:05.000000000 -0500 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Chapter 5. Making Happy Users

    Chapter 5. Making Happy Users

    +Chapter 5. Making Happy Users

    Chapter 5. Making Happy Users

    It is said that “a day that is without troubles is not fulfilling. Rather, give me a day of troubles well handled so that I can be content with my achievements.

    @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ or experience them. The design of the network implemented in ??? may create problems for some network users. The following lists some of the problems that may occur: -

    Caution

    +

    Caution

    A significant number of network administrators have responded to the guidance given here. It should be noted that there are sites that have a single PDC for many hundreds of concurrent network clients. Network bandwidth, network bandwidth utilization, and server load @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ overloaded or network bandwidth is overloaded. The guidance given for PDC/BDC ratio to Windows clients is conservative and if followed will minimize problems but it is not absolute.

    Users experiencing difficulty logging onto the network

    - - + + When a Windows client logs onto the network, many data packets are exchanged between the client and the server that is providing the network logon services. Each request between the client and the server must complete within a specific @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ 30 to 150 clients. The actual limits are determined by network operational characteristics.

    - - - + + + If the domain controller provides only network logon services and all file and print activity is handled by domain member servers, one domain controller per 150 clients on a single network segment may suffice. In any @@ -46,25 +46,25 @@ that can be supported is limited by the CPU speed, memory and the workload on the Samba server as well as network bandwidth utilization.

    Slow logons and log-offs

    - + Slow logons and log-offs may be caused by many factors that include:

    • - - + + Excessive delays in the resolution of a NetBIOS name to its IP address. This may be observed when an overloaded domain controller is also the WINS server. Another cause may be the failure to use a WINS server (this assumes that there is a single network segment).

    • - - - + + + Network traffic collisions due to overloading of the network segment. One short-term workaround to this may be to replace network HUBs with Ethernet switches.

    • - + Defective networking hardware. Over the past few years, we have seen on the Samba mailing list a significant increase in the number of problems that were traced to a defective network interface controller, @@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ it was the erratic nature of the problem that ultimately pointed to the cause of the problem.

    • - - + + Excessively large roaming profiles. This type of problem is typically the result of poor user education as well as poor network management. It can be avoided by users not storing huge quantities of email in @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ These are old bad habits that require much discipline and vigilance on the part of network management.

    • - + You should verify that the Windows XP WebClient service is not running. The use of the WebClient service has been implicated in many Windows networking-related problems. @@ -90,26 +90,26 @@ Loss of access to network resources during client operation may be caused by a number of factors, including:

      • - + Network overload (typically indicated by a high network collision rate)

      • Server overload

      • - + Timeout causing the client to close a connection that is in use but has been latent (no traffic) for some time (5 minutes or more)

      • - + Defective networking hardware

      - + No matter what the cause, a sudden loss of access to network resources can result in BSOD (blue screen of death) situations that necessitate rebooting of the client workstation. In the case of a mild problem, retrying to access the network drive of the printer may restore operations, but in any case this is a serious problem that may lead to the next problem, data corruption.

    Potential data corruption

    - + Data corruption is one of the most serious problems. It leads to uncertainty, anger, and frustration, and generally precipitates immediate corrective demands. Management response to this type of problem may be rational, as well as highly irrational. There have been @@ -123,29 +123,29 @@ anticipate and combat network performance issues. You can work through complex and thorny methods to improve the reliability of your network environment, but be warned that all such steps demand the price of complexity. -

    Regarding LDAP Directories and Windows Computer Accounts

    - +

    Regarding LDAP Directories and Windows Computer Accounts

    + Computer (machine) accounts can be placed wherever you like in an LDAP directory subject to some constraints that are described in this section.

    - - - - + + + + The POSIX and SambaSAMAccount components of computer (machine) accounts are both used by Samba. That is, machine accounts are treated inside Samba in the same way that Windows NT4/200X treats them. A user account and a machine account are indistinguishable from each other, except that the machine account ends in a $ character, as do trust accounts.

    - - + + The need for Windows user, group, machine, trust, and other such accounts to be tied to a valid UNIX UID is a design decision that was made a long way back in the history of Samba development. It is unlikely that this decision will be reversed or changed during the remaining life of the Samba-3.x series.

    - - + + The resolution of a UID from the Windows SID is achieved within Samba through a mechanism that must refer back to the host operating system on which Samba is running. The name service switch (NSS) is the preferred mechanism that shields applications (like Samba) from the @@ -158,13 +158,13 @@ possible to do this via LDAP, and for that Samba provides the appropriate hooks so that all account entities can be located in an LDAP directory.

    - + For many the weapon of choice is to use the PADL nss_ldap utility. This utility must be configured so that computer accounts can be resolved to a POSIX/UNIX account UID. That is fundamentally an LDAP design question. The information provided on the Samba list and in the documentation is directed at providing working examples only. The design of an LDAP directory is a complex subject that is beyond the scope of this documentation. -

    Introduction

    +

    Introduction

    You just opened an email from Christine that reads:

    Good morning, @@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ regain control of our vital IT operations.

     
     --Christine

    - - + + Every compromise has consequences. Having a large routed (i.e., multisegment) network with only a single domain controller is a poor design that has obvious operational effects that may frustrate users. Here is your reply: @@ -204,56 +204,56 @@ boost staff morale. Please go ahead with your plans. If you have any problems, please let me know. Please let Stan know what the estimated cost will be so I can approve the expense. Do not wait for approval; I appreciate the urgency. -

     
     --Bob

    Assignment Tasks

    +

     
     --Bob

    Assignment Tasks

    The priority of assigned tasks in this chapter is:

    1. - - - - + + + + Implement Backup Domain Controllers (BDCs) in each building. This involves a change from a tdbsam backend that was used in the previous chapter to an LDAP-based backend.

      You can implement a single central LDAP server for this purpose.

    2. - - - - + + + + Rectify the problem of excessive logon times. This involves redirection of folders to network shares as well as modification of all user desktops to exclude the redirected folders from being loaded at login time. You can also create a new default profile that can be used for all new users.

    - + You configure a new MS Windows XP Professional workstation disk image that you roll out to all desktop users. The instructions you have created are followed on a staging machine from which all changes can be carefully tested before inflicting them on your network users.

    - + This is the last network example in which specific mention of printing is made. The example again makes use of the CUPS printing system. -

    Dissection and Discussion

    - - - +

    Dissection and Discussion

    + + + The implementation of Samba BDCs necessitates the installation and configuration of LDAP. For this site, you use OpenLDAP, the open source software LDAP server platform. Commercial LDAP servers in current use with Samba-3 include:

    • - + Novell eDirectory is being successfully used by some sites. Information on how to use eDirectory can be obtained from the Samba mailing lists or from Novell.

    • - + IBM Tivoli Directory Server can be used to provide the Samba LDAP backend. Example schema files are provided in the Samba source code tarball under the directory ~samba/example/LDAP.

    • - + Sun ONE Identity Server product suite provides an LDAP server that can be used for Samba. Example schema files are provided in the Samba source code tarball under the directory @@ -264,19 +264,19 @@ initialize the LDAP directory database. OpenLDAP itself has only command-line tools to help you to get OpenLDAP and Samba-3 running as required, albeit with some learning curve challenges.

      - + For most sites, the deployment of Microsoft Active Directory from the shrink-wrapped installation is quite adequate. If you are migrating from Microsoft Active Directory, be warned that OpenLDAP does not include GUI-based directory management tools. Even a simple task such as adding users to the OpenLDAP database requires an understanding of what you are doing, why you are doing it, and the tools that you must use.

      - - - - - - - + + + + + + + When installed and configured, an OpenLDAP Identity Management backend for Samba functions well. High availability operation may be obtained through directory replication/synchronization and master/slave server configurations. OpenLDAP is a mature platform to host the organizational @@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ contents with greater ability to back up, restore, and modify the directory than is generally possible with Microsoft Active Directory.

      - - - - + + + + A comparison of OpenLDAP with Microsoft Active Directory does not do justice to either. OpenLDAP is an LDAP directory tool-set. Microsoft Active Directory Server is an implementation of an LDAP server that is largely preconfigured for a specific task orientation. It comes with a set of administrative tools that is entirely customized @@ -300,8 +300,8 @@ MS ADAM that provides more generic LDAP services, yet it does not have the vanilla-like services of OpenLDAP.

      - - + + You may wish to consider outsourcing the development of your OpenLDAP directory to an expert, particularly if you find the challenge of learning about LDAP directories, schemas, configuration, and management tools and the creation of shell and Perl scripts a bit @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ many ready-to-use schemas. Samba-3 provides an OpenLDAP schema file that is required for use as a passdb backend.

      - + For those who are willing to brave the process of installing and configuring LDAP and Samba-3 interoperability, there are a few nice Web-based tools that may help you to manage your users and groups more effectively. The Web-based tools you might like to consider include the @@ -334,10 +334,10 @@ LDAP System Administration, by Jerry Carter quite useful.

      - - - - + + + + Mary's problems are due to two factors. First, the absence of a domain controller on the local network is the main cause of the errors that result in blue screen crashes. Second, Mary has a large profile that must be loaded over the WAN connection. The addition of BDCs on each network segment significantly @@ -345,31 +345,31 @@ user desktops, and this must be done in a way that wins their support and does not cause further loss of staff morale. The following procedures solve this problem.

      - + There is also an opportunity to implement smart printing features. You add this to the Samba configuration so that future printer changes can be managed without need to change desktop configurations.

      You add the ability to automatically download new printer drivers, even if they are not installed in the default desktop profile. Only one example of printing configuration is given. It is assumed that you can extrapolate the principles and use them to install all printers that may be needed. -

      Technical Issues

      - - - +

      Technical Issues

      + + + The solution provided is a minimal approach to getting OpenLDAP running as an identity management directory server for UNIX system accounts as well as for Samba. From the OpenLDAP perspective, UNIX system accounts are stored POSIX schema extensions. Samba provides its own schema to permit storage of account attributes Samba needs. Samba-3 can use the LDAP backend to store:

      • Windows Networking User Accounts

      • Windows NT Group Accounts

      • Mapping Information between UNIX Groups and Windows NT Groups

      • ID Mappings for SIDs to UIDs (also for foreign Domain SIDs)

      - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + The use of LDAP with Samba-3 makes it necessary to store UNIX accounts as well as Windows Networking accounts in the LDAP backend. This implies the need to use the PADL LDAP tools. The resolution @@ -378,16 +378,16 @@ that integrates with the NSS. The same requirements exist for resolution of the UNIX username to the UID. The relationships are demonstrated in ???.

      Figure 5.1. The Interaction of LDAP, UNIX Posix Accounts and Samba Accounts

      The Interaction of LDAP, UNIX Posix Accounts and Samba Accounts

      - - + + You configure OpenLDAP so that it is operational. Before deploying the OpenLDAP, you really ought to learn how to configure secure communications over LDAP so that site security is not at risk. This is not covered in the following guidance.

      - - - - + + + + When OpenLDAP has been made operative, you configure the PDC called MASSIVE. You initialize the Samba secrets.tdb file. Then you create the LDAP Interchange Format (LDIF) file from which the LDAP database can be initialized. @@ -395,27 +395,27 @@ You can also find on the enclosed CD-ROM, in the Chap06 directory, a few tools that help to manage user and group configuration.

      - - - + + + In order to effect folder redirection and to add robustness to the implementation, create a network default profile. All network users workstations are configured to use the new profile. Roaming profiles will automatically be deleted from the workstation when the user logs off.

      - + The profile is configured so that users cannot change the appearance of their desktop. This is known as a mandatory profile. You make certain that users are able to use their computers efficiently.

      - + A network logon script is used to deliver flexible but consistent network drive connections.

      Addition of Machines to the Domain

      - - - - + + + + Samba versions prior to 3.0.11 necessitated the use of a domain administrator account that maps to the UNIX UID=0. The UNIX operating system permits only the root user to add user and group accounts. Samba 3.0.11 introduced a new facility known as @@ -425,13 +425,13 @@ In this network example use is made of one of the supported privileges purely to demonstrate how any user can now be given the ability to add machines to the domain using a normal user account that has been given the appropriate privileges. -

      Roaming Profile Background

      +

      Roaming Profile Background

      As XP roaming profiles grow, so does the amount of time it takes to log in and out.

      - - - - + + + + An XP roaming profile consists of the HKEY_CURRENT_USER hive file NTUSER.DAT and a number of folders (My Documents, Application Data, Desktop, Start Menu, Templates, NetHood, Favorites, and so on). When a user logs onto the @@ -453,20 +453,20 @@ user to not place large files on the desktop and to use his or her mapped home directory instead of the My Documents folder for saving documents.

      - + Using a folder other than My Documents is a nuisance for some users, since many applications use it by default.

      - - - + + + The secret to rapid loading of roaming profiles is to prevent unnecessary data from being copied back and forth, without losing any functionality. This is not difficult; it can be done by making changes to the Local Group Policy on each client as well as changing some paths in each user's NTUSER.DAT hive.

      - - + + Every user profile has its own NTUSER.DAT file. This means you need to edit every user's profile, unless a better method can be followed. Fortunately, with the right preparations, this is not difficult. @@ -475,10 +475,10 @@ necessary to copy all files from redirected folders to the network share to which they are redirected.

      The Local Group Policy

      - - - - + + + + Without an Active Directory PDC, you cannot take full advantage of Group Policy Objects. However, you can still make changes to the Local Group Policy by using the Group Policy editor (gpedit.msc). @@ -492,26 +492,26 @@ Simply add the folders you do not wish to be copied back and forth to this semicolon-separated list. Note that this change must be made on all clients that are using roaming profiles. -

      Profile Changes

      - - +

      Profile Changes

      + + There are two changes that should be done to each user's profile. Move each of the directories that you have excluded from being copied back and forth out of the usual profile path. Modify each user's NTUSER.DAT file to point to the new paths that are shared over the network instead of to the default path (C:\Documents and Settings\%USERNAME%).

      - - + + The above modifies existing user profiles. So that newly created profiles have these settings, you need to modify the NTUSER.DAT in the C:\Documents and Settings\Default User folder on each client machine, changing the same registry keys. You could do this by copying NTUSER.DAT to a Linux box and using regedt32. The basic method is described under ???. -

      Using a Network Default User Profile

      - - +

      Using a Network Default User Profile

      + + If you are using Samba as your PDC, you should create a file share called NETLOGON and within that create a directory called Default User, which is a copy of the desired default user @@ -520,10 +520,10 @@ the first login from a new account pulls its configuration from it. See also the Real Men Don't Click Web site. -

      Installation of Printer Driver Auto-Download

      - - - +

      Installation of Printer Driver Auto-Download

      + + + The subject of printing is quite topical. Printing problems run second place to name resolution issues today. So far in this book, you have experienced only what is generally known as “dumb” printing. Dumb printing is the arrangement by which all drivers @@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ many problems, but it has its limitations also. Dumb printing is better known as Raw-Print-Through printing.

      - - + + Samba permits the configuration of smart printing using the Microsoft Windows point-and-click (also called drag-and-drop) printing. What this provides is essentially the ability to print to any printer. If the local client does not yet have a @@ -547,9 +547,9 @@ then invokes a suitable print filter to convert the incoming data stream into a format suited to the printer to which the job is dispatched.

      - - - + + + The CUPS printing subsystem is capable of intelligent printing. It has the capacity to detect the data format and apply a print filter. This means that it is feasible to install on all Windows clients a single printer driver for use with all printers that are routed @@ -574,10 +574,10 @@ simple problems efficiently and effectively.

      Here are some diagnostic guidelines that can be referred to when things go wrong: -

      Preliminary Advice: Dangers Can Be Avoided

      +

      Preliminary Advice: Dangers Can Be Avoided

      The best advice regarding how to mend a broken leg is “Never break a leg!

      - + Newcomers to Samba and LDAP seem to struggle a great deal at first. If you want advice regarding the best way to remedy LDAP and Samba problems: “Avoid them like the plague!

      @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ Do not be lulled into thinking that you can easily adopt the examples in this book and adapt them without first working through the examples provided. A little thing overlooked can cause untold pain and may permanently tarnish your experience. -

      The Name Service Caching Daemon

      +

      The Name Service Caching Daemon

      The name service caching daemon (nscd) is a primary cause of difficulties with name resolution, particularly where winbind is used. Winbind does its own caching, thus nscd causes double caching which can lead to peculiar problems during @@ -660,17 +660,17 @@ root# chkconfig nscd off root# rcnscd off

      -

      Debugging LDAP

      - - - +

      Debugging LDAP

      + + + In the example /etc/openldap/slapd.conf control file (see ???) there is an entry for loglevel 256. To enable logging via the syslog infrastructure, it is necessary to uncomment this parameter and restart slapd.

      - - + + LDAP log information can be directed into a file that is separate from the normal system log files by changing the /etc/syslog.conf file so it has the following contents: @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ local site needs. The configuration used later in this chapter reflects such customization with the intent that LDAP log files will be stored at a location that meets local site needs and wishes more fully. -

      Debugging NSS_LDAP

      +

      Debugging NSS_LDAP

      The basic mechanism for diagnosing problems with the nss_ldap utility involves adding to the /etc/ldap.conf file the following parameters:

      @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@
       

      The diagnostic process should follow these steps: -

      Procedure 5.1. NSS_LDAP Diagnostic Steps

      1. +

        Procedure 5.1. NSS_LDAP Diagnostic Steps

        1. Verify the nss_base_passwd, nss_base_shadow, nss_base_group entries in the /etc/ldap.conf file and compare them closely with the directory tree location that was chosen when the directory was first created. @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ Check that the bindpw entry in the /etc/ldap.conf or in the /etc/ldap.secrets file is correct, as specified in the /etc/openldap/slapd.conf file. -

      Debugging Samba

      +

    Debugging Samba

    The following parameters in the smb.conf file can be useful in tracking down Samba-related problems:

     [global]
    @@ -822,17 +822,17 @@
     		

    Search for hints of what may have failed by looking for the words fail and error. -

    Debugging on the Windows Client

    +

    Debugging on the Windows Client

    MS Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional clients can be configured to create a netlogon.log file that can be very helpful in diagnosing network logon problems. Search the Microsoft knowledge base for detailed instructions. The techniques vary a little with each version of MS Windows. -

    Political Issues

    +

    Political Issues

    MS Windows network users are generally very sensitive to limits that may be imposed when confronted with locked-down workstation configurations. The challenge you face must be promoted as a choice between reliable, fast network operation and a constant flux of problems that result in user irritation. -

    Installation Checklist

    +

    Installation Checklist

    You are starting a complex project. Even though you went through the installation of a complex network in ???, this network is a bigger challenge because of the large number of complex applications that must be configured before the first few steps @@ -840,14 +840,14 @@ frequently review the steps ahead while making at least a mental note of what has already been completed. The following task list may help you to keep track of the task items that are covered: -

    • Samba-3 PDC Server Configuration

      1. DHCP and DNS servers

      2. OpenLDAP server

      3. PAM and NSS client tools

      4. Samba-3 PDC

      5. Idealx smbldap scripts

      6. LDAP initialization

      7. Create user and group accounts

      8. Printers

      9. Share point directory roots

      10. Profile directories

      11. Logon scripts

      12. Configuration of user rights and privileges

    • Samba-3 BDC Server Configuration

      1. DHCP and DNS servers

      2. PAM and NSS client tools

      3. Printers

      4. Share point directory roots

      5. Profiles directories

    • Windows XP Client Configuration

      1. Default profile folder redirection

      2. MS Outlook PST file relocation

      3. Delete roaming profile on logout

      4. Upload printer drivers to Samba servers

      5. Install software

      6. Creation of roll-out images

    Samba Server Implementation

    - - +

    • Samba-3 PDC Server Configuration

      1. DHCP and DNS servers

      2. OpenLDAP server

      3. PAM and NSS client tools

      4. Samba-3 PDC

      5. Idealx smbldap scripts

      6. LDAP initialization

      7. Create user and group accounts

      8. Printers

      9. Share point directory roots

      10. Profile directories

      11. Logon scripts

      12. Configuration of user rights and privileges

    • Samba-3 BDC Server Configuration

      1. DHCP and DNS servers

      2. PAM and NSS client tools

      3. Printers

      4. Share point directory roots

      5. Profiles directories

    • Windows XP Client Configuration

      1. Default profile folder redirection

      2. MS Outlook PST file relocation

      3. Delete roaming profile on logout

      4. Upload printer drivers to Samba servers

      5. Install software

      6. Creation of roll-out images

    Samba Server Implementation

    + + The network design shown in ??? is not comprehensive. It is assumed that you will install additional file servers and possibly additional BDCs.

    Figure 5.2. Network Topology 500 User Network Using ldapsam passdb backend

    Network Topology 500 User Network Using ldapsam passdb backend

    - - + + All configuration files and locations are shown for SUSE Linux 9.2 and are equally valid for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9. The file locations for Red Hat Linux are similar. You may need to adjust the locations for your particular Linux system distribution/implementation. @@ -868,22 +868,22 @@ with newly installed Linux servers, you must complete the steps shown in ??? before commencing at ???.

    OpenLDAP Server Configuration

    - - - + + + Confirm that the packages shown in ??? are installed on your system.

    Table 5.2. Required OpenLDAP Linux Packages

    SUSE Linux 8.xSUSE Linux 9.xRed Hat Linux
    nss_ldapnss_ldapnss_ldap
    pam_ldappam_ldappam_ldap
    openldap2openldap2openldap
    openldap2-clientopenldap2-client 

    Samba-3 and OpenLDAP will have a degree of interdependence that is unavoidable. The method for bootstrapping the LDAP and Samba-3 configuration is relatively straightforward. If you follow these guidelines, the resulting system should work fine. -

    Procedure 5.2. OpenLDAP Server Configuration Steps

    1. - +

      Procedure 5.2. OpenLDAP Server Configuration Steps

      1. + Install the file shown in ??? in the directory /etc/openldap.

      2. - - - + + + Remove all files from the directory /data/ldap, making certain that the directory exists with permissions:

        @@ -892,14 +892,14 @@
         

        This may require you to add a user and a group account for LDAP if they do not exist.

      3. - + Install the file shown in ??? in the directory /data/ldap. In the event that this file is added after ldap has been started, it is possible to cause the new settings to take effect by shutting down the LDAP server, executing the db_recover command inside the /data/ldap directory, and then restarting the LDAP server.

      4. - + Performance logging can be enabled and should preferably be sent to a file on a file system that is large enough to handle significantly sized logs. To enable the logging at a verbose level to permit detailed analysis, uncomment the entry in @@ -975,31 +975,31 @@ index sambaDomainName eq index default sub

    PAM and NSS Client Configuration

    - - - + + + The steps that follow involve configuration of LDAP, NSS LDAP-based resolution of users and groups. Also, so that LDAP-based accounts can log onto the system, the steps ahead configure the Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) to permit LDAP-based authentication.

    - - + + Since you have chosen to put UNIX user and group accounts into the LDAP database, it is likely that you may want to use them for UNIX system (Linux) local machine logons. This necessitates correct configuration of PAM. The pam_ldap open source package provides the PAM modules that most people would use. On SUSE Linux systems, the pam_unix2.so module also has the ability to redirect authentication requests through LDAP.

    - - - - + + + + You have chosen to configure these services by directly editing the system files, but of course, you know that this configuration can be done using system tools provided by the Linux system vendor. SUSE Linux has a facility in YaST (the system admin tool) through yast->system->ldap-client that permits configuration of SUSE Linux as an LDAP client. Red Hat Linux provides the authconfig tool for this. -

    Procedure 5.3. PAM and NSS Client Configuration Steps

    Example 5.4. Configuration File for NSS LDAP Support /etc/ldap.conf

    +	

    Procedure 5.3. PAM and NSS Client Configuration Steps

    Example 5.4. Configuration File for NSS LDAP Support /etc/ldap.conf

     host 127.0.0.1
     
     base dc=abmas,dc=biz
    @@ -1042,9 +1042,9 @@
     
     ssl off
     
    1. - - - + + + Execute the following command to find where the nss_ldap module expects to find its control file:

      @@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@
       		On the servers called BLDG1 and BLDG2, install the file shown in
       		??? into the path that was obtained from the step above.
       		

    2. - + Edit the NSS control file (/etc/nsswitch.conf) so that the lines that control user and group resolution will obtain information from the normal system files as well as from ldap: @@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ Even at the risk of overstating the issue, incorrect and inappropriate configuration of the nsswitch.conf file is a significant cause of operational problems with LDAP.

    3. - + For PAM LDAP configuration on this SUSE Linux 9.0 system, the simplest solution is to edit the following files in the /etc/pam.d directory: login, password, samba, sshd. In each file, locate every entry that has the @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ session required pam_limits.so

    - + On other Linux systems that do not have an LDAP-enabled pam_unix2.so module, you must edit these files by adding the pam_ldap.so modules as shown here:

    @@ -1126,14 +1126,14 @@
     		implementation, but if the pam_unix2.so on your system supports
     		LDAP, you probably want to use it rather than add an additional module.
     		

    Samba-3 PDC Configuration

    - + Verify that the Samba-3.0.20 (or later) packages are installed on each SUSE Linux server before following the steps below. If Samba-3.0.20 (or later) is not installed, you have the choice to either build your own or obtain the packages from a dependable source. Packages for SUSE Linux 8.x, 9.x, and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9, as well as for Red Hat Fedora Core and Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 3 and 4, are included on the CD-ROM that is included with this book. -

    Procedure 5.4. Configuration of PDC Called MASSIVE

    1. +

      Procedure 5.4. Configuration of PDC Called MASSIVE

      1. Install the files in ???, ???, ???, and ??? into the /etc/samba/ @@ -1143,7 +1143,7 @@ on the master file. The operational smb.conf is then generated as shown in the next step.

      2. - + Create and verify the contents of the smb.conf file that is generated by:

         root#  testparm -s smb.conf.master > smb.conf
        @@ -1180,8 +1180,8 @@
         root#  rm /var/log/samba/*
         

      3. - - + + Samba-3 communicates with the LDAP server. The password that it uses to authenticate to the LDAP server must be stored in the secrets.tdb file. Execute the following to create the new secrets.tdb files @@ -1194,8 +1194,8 @@ Setting stored password for "cn=Manager,dc=abmas,dc=biz" in secrets.tdb

      4. - - + + Samba-3 generates a Windows Security Identifier (SID) only when smbd has been started. For this reason, you start Samba. After a few seconds delay, execute: @@ -1229,10 +1229,10 @@

      5. When a positive domain SID has been reported, stop Samba.

      6. - - - - + + + + Configure the NFS server for your Linux system. So you can complete the steps that follow, enter into the /etc/exports the following entry:

        @@ -1250,8 +1250,8 @@
         		

      Your Samba-3 PDC is now ready to communicate with the LDAP password backend. Let's get on with configuration of the LDAP server. -

      Example 5.6. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: MASSIVE global Section: Part A

      # Global parameters
      [global]
      unix charset = LOCALE
      workgroup = MEGANET2
      netbios name = MASSIVE
      interfaces = eth1, lo
      bind interfaces only = Yes
      passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      enable privileges = Yes
      username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
      log level = 1
      syslog = 0
      log file = /var/log/samba/%m
      max log size = 50
      smb ports = 139
      name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
      time server = Yes
      printcap name = CUPS
      show add printer wizard = No
      add user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -m "%u"
      delete user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-userdel "%u"
      add group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupadd -p "%g"
      delete group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupdel "%g"
      add user to group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -m "%u" "%g"
      delete user from group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -x "%u" "%g"
      set primary group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-usermod -g "%g" "%u"
      add machine script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -w "%u"

      Example 5.7. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: MASSIVE global Section: Part B

      logon script = scripts\logon.bat
      logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
      logon drive = X:
      domain logons = Yes
      preferred master = Yes
      wins support = Yes
      ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
      ldap machine suffix = ou=People
      ldap user suffix = ou=People
      ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
      ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
      ldap admin dn = cn=Manager,dc=abmas,dc=biz
      idmap backend = ldap:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
      idmap uid = 10000-20000
      idmap gid = 10000-20000
      map acl inherit = Yes
      printing = cups
      printer admin = root, chrisr

    Install and Configure Idealx smbldap-tools Scripts

    - +

    Example 5.6. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: MASSIVE global Section: Part A

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    unix charset = LOCALE
    workgroup = MEGANET2
    netbios name = MASSIVE
    interfaces = eth1, lo
    bind interfaces only = Yes
    passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
    enable privileges = Yes
    username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
    log level = 1
    syslog = 0
    log file = /var/log/samba/%m
    max log size = 50
    smb ports = 139
    name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
    time server = Yes
    printcap name = CUPS
    show add printer wizard = No
    add user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -m "%u"
    delete user script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-userdel "%u"
    add group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupadd -p "%g"
    delete group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupdel "%g"
    add user to group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -m "%u" "%g"
    delete user from group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-groupmod -x "%u" "%g"
    set primary group script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-usermod -g "%g" "%u"
    add machine script = /opt/IDEALX/sbin/smbldap-useradd -w "%u"

    Example 5.7. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: MASSIVE global Section: Part B

    logon script = scripts\logon.bat
    logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
    logon drive = X:
    domain logons = Yes
    preferred master = Yes
    wins support = Yes
    ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
    ldap machine suffix = ou=People
    ldap user suffix = ou=People
    ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
    ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
    ldap admin dn = cn=Manager,dc=abmas,dc=biz
    idmap backend = ldap:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
    idmap uid = 10000-20000
    idmap gid = 10000-20000
    map acl inherit = Yes
    printing = cups
    printer admin = root, chrisr

    Install and Configure Idealx smbldap-tools Scripts

    + The Idealx scripts, or equivalent, are necessary to permit Samba-3 to manage accounts on the LDAP server. You have chosen the Idealx scripts because they are the best-known LDAP configuration scripts. The use of these scripts will help avoid the necessity @@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ The smbldap-tools are located in /opt/IDEALX/sbin. The scripts are not needed on BDC machines because all LDAP updates are handled by the PDC alone. -

    Installation of smbldap-tools from the Tarball

    +

    Installation of smbldap-tools from the Tarball

    To perform a manual installation of the smbldap-tools scripts, the following procedure may be used:

    Procedure 5.5. Unpacking and Installation Steps for the smbldap-tools Tarball

    1. Create the /opt/IDEALX/sbin directory, and set its permissions @@ -1320,10 +1320,10 @@

      The smbldap-tools scripts are now ready for the configuration step outlined in ???. -

    Installing smbldap-tools from the RPM Package

    +

    Installing smbldap-tools from the RPM Package

    In the event that you have elected to use the RPM package provided by Idealx, download the source RPM smbldap-tools-0.9.1-1.src.rpm, then follow this procedure: -

    Procedure 5.6. Installation Steps for smbldap-tools RPM's

    1. +

      Procedure 5.6. Installation Steps for smbldap-tools RPM's

      1. Install the source RPM that has been downloaded as follows:

         root#  rpm -i smbldap-tools-0.9.1-1.src.rpm
        @@ -1368,7 +1368,7 @@
         	

        The smbldap-tools require that the NetBIOS name (machine name) of the Samba server be included in the smb.conf file. -

        Procedure 5.7. Configuration Steps for smbldap-tools to Enable Use

        1. +

          Procedure 5.7. Configuration Steps for smbldap-tools to Enable Use

          1. Change into the directory that contains the configure.pl script.

             root#  cd /opt/IDEALX/sbin
            @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@
             		then verify its contents.
             		

          The smbldap-tools are now ready for use. -

      LDAP Initialization and Creation of User and Group Accounts

      +

    LDAP Initialization and Creation of User and Group Accounts

    The LDAP database must be populated with well-known Windows domain user accounts and domain group accounts before Samba can be used. The following procedures step you through the process.

    @@ -1487,12 +1487,12 @@

    Addition of an account to the LDAP backend can be done in two ways:

    • - - - - - - + + + + + + If you always have a user account in the /etc/passwd on every server or in a NIS(+) backend, it is not necessary to add POSIX accounts for them in LDAP. In this case, you can add Windows domain user accounts using the @@ -1510,20 +1510,20 @@ Idealx smbldap-tools scripts. A copy of these tools, preconfigured for this system, is included on the enclosed CD-ROM under Chap06/Tools.

    - + If you wish to have more control over how the LDAP database is initialized or if you don't want to use the Idealx smbldap-tools, you should refer to ???, ???.

    - + The following steps initialize the LDAP database, and then you can add user and group accounts that Samba can use. You use the smbldap-populate to seed the LDAP database. You then manually add the accounts shown in ???. The list of users does not cover all 500 network users; it provides examples only.

    Note

    - - - + + + In the following examples, as the LDAP database is initialized, we do create a container for Computer (machine) accounts. In the Samba-3 smb.conf files, specific use is made of the People container, not the Computers container, for domain member accounts. This is not a @@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ Starting ldap-server done

  • - + So that we can use a global IDMAP repository, the LDAP directory must have a container object for IDMAP data. There are several ways you can check that your LDAP database is able to receive IDMAP information. One of the simplest is to execute: @@ -1609,7 +1609,7 @@ dn: ou=Idmap,dc=abmas,dc=biz ou: idmap

    - + If the execution of this command does not return IDMAP entries, you need to create an LDIF template file (see ???). You can add the required entries using the following command: @@ -1619,7 +1619,7 @@

    Samba automatically populates this LDAP directory container when it needs to.

  • - + It looks like all has gone well, as expected. Let's confirm that this is the case by running a few tests. First we check the contents of the database directly by running slapcat as follows (the output has been cut down): @@ -1657,7 +1657,7 @@

    This looks good so far.

  • - + The next step is to prove that the LDAP server is running and responds to a search request. Execute the following as shown (output has been cut to save space):

    @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@
     

    Good. It is all working just fine.

  • - + You must now make certain that the NSS resolver can interrogate LDAP also. Execute the following commands:

    @@ -1715,16 +1715,16 @@
     Domain Guests:x:514:
     Domain Computers:x:553:
     

    - + This demonstrates that the nss_ldap library is functioning as it should. If these two steps fail to produce this information, refer to ??? for diagnostic procedures that can be followed to isolate the cause of the problem. Proceed to the next step only when the previous steps have been successfully completed.

  • - - - + + + Our database is now ready for the addition of network users. For each user for whom an account must be created, execute the following:

    @@ -1740,7 +1740,7 @@
     

    where username is the login ID for each user.

  • - + Now verify that the UNIX (POSIX) accounts can be resolved via NSS by executing the following:

    @@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@
     		This confirms that the UNIX (POSIX) user account information can be resolved from LDAP
     		by system tools that make a getentpw() system call.
     		

  • - + The root account must have UID=0; if not, this means that operations conducted from a Windows client using tools such as the Domain User Manager fails under UNIX because the management of user and group accounts requires that the UID=0. Additionally, it is @@ -1802,8 +1802,8 @@

    This is precisely what we want to see.

  • - - + + The final validation step involves making certain that Samba-3 can obtain the user accounts from the LDAP ldapsam passwd backend. Execute the following command as shown:

    @@ -1834,7 +1834,7 @@
     

    This looks good. Of course, you fully expected that it would all work, didn't you?

  • - + Now you add the group accounts that are used on the Abmas network. Execute the following exactly as shown:

    @@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@
     		The addition of groups does not involve keyboard interaction, so the lack of console
     		output is of no concern.
     		

  • - + You really do want to confirm that UNIX group resolution from LDAP is functioning as it should. Let's do this as shown here:

    @@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@
     		The well-known special accounts (Domain Admins, Domain Users, Domain Guests), as well
     		as our own site-specific group accounts, are correctly listed. This is looking good.
     		

  • - + The final step we need to validate is that Samba can see all the Windows domain groups and that they are correctly mapped to the respective UNIX group account. To do this, just execute the following command: @@ -1917,7 +1917,7 @@ root# rcwinbind restart

  • - + You may now check Samba-3 operation as follows:

     root#  smbclient -L massive -U%
    @@ -1963,12 +1963,12 @@
     		

  • The server MASSIVE is now configured, and it is time to move onto the next task.

    Printer Configuration

    - + The configuration for Samba-3 to enable CUPS raw-print-through printing has already been taken care of in the smb.conf file. The only preparation needed for smart printing to be possible involves creation of the directories in which Samba-3 stores Windows printing driver files. -

    Procedure 5.9. Printer Configuration Steps

    1. +

      Procedure 5.9. Printer Configuration Steps

      1. Configure all network-attached printers to have a fixed IP address.

      2. Create an entry in the DNS database on the server MASSIVE @@ -1980,18 +1980,18 @@ Follow the instructions in the printer manufacturers' manuals to permit printing to port 9100. Use any other port the manufacturer specifies for direct mode, raw printing. This allows the CUPS spooler to print using raw mode protocols. - - + +

      3. - - + + Only on the server to which the printer is attached, configure the CUPS Print Queues as follows:

         root#  lpadmin -p printque
         	 -v socket://printer-name.abmas.biz:9100 -E
         

        - + This step creates the necessary print queue to use no assigned print filter. This is ideal for raw printing, that is, printing without use of filters. The name printque is the name you have assigned for @@ -2011,15 +2011,15 @@ root# /usr/bin/accept printque

      4. - - - + + + Edit the file /etc/cups/mime.convs to uncomment the line:

         application/octet-stream     application/vnd.cups-raw      0     -
         

      5. - + Edit the file /etc/cups/mime.types to uncomment the line:

         application/octet-stream
        @@ -2038,7 +2038,7 @@
         root#  chown -R root:root /var/lib/samba/drivers
         root#  chmod -R ug=rwx,o=rx /var/lib/samba/drivers
         

        -

    Samba-3 BDC Configuration

    Procedure 5.10. Configuration of BDC Called: BLDG1

    1. +

    Samba-3 BDC Configuration

    Procedure 5.10. Configuration of BDC Called: BLDG1

    1. Install the files in ???, ???, and ??? into the /etc/samba/ directory. The three files @@ -2081,7 +2081,7 @@

      This is the correct output. If the accounts that have UIDs above 512 are not shown, there is a problem.

    2. - + The next step in the verification process involves testing the operation of UNIX group resolution via the NSS LDAP resolver. Execute these commands:

      @@ -2111,7 +2111,7 @@
       		This is also the correct and desired output, because it demonstrates that the LDAP client
       		is able to communicate correctly with the LDAP server (MASSIVE).
       		

    3. - + You must now set the LDAP administrative password into the Samba-3 secrets.tdb file by executing this command:

      @@ -2143,7 +2143,7 @@
       

      This indicates that the domain security account for the BDC has been correctly created.

    4. - + Verify that user and group account resolution works via Samba-3 tools as follows:

       root#  pdbedit -L
      @@ -2231,19 +2231,19 @@
       		should be added together to form the smb.conf file.
       		

    5. Follow carefully the steps shown in ???, starting at step 2. -

    Example 5.8. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: BLDG1

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    unix charset = LOCALE
    workgroup = MEGANET2
    netbios name = BLDG1
    passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
    enable privileges = Yes
    username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
    log level = 1
    syslog = 0
    log file = /var/log/samba/%m
    max log size = 50
    smb ports = 139
    name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
    printcap name = CUPS
    show add printer wizard = No
    logon script = scripts\logon.bat
    logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
    logon drive = X:
    domain logons = Yes
    domain master = No
    wins server = 172.16.0.1
    ldap suffix = dc=abmas,dc=biz
    ldap machine suffix = ou=People
    ldap user suffix = ou=People
    ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
    ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
    ldap admin dn = cn=Manager,dc=abmas,dc=biz
    idmap backend = ldap:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
    idmap uid = 10000-20000
    idmap gid = 10000-20000
    printing = cups
    printer admin = root, chrisr

    Example 5.9. LDAP Based smb.conf File, Server: BLDG2

    # Global parameters
    [global]
    unix charset = LOCALE
    workgroup = MEGANET2
    netbios name = BLDG2
    passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://massive.abmas.biz
    enable privileges = Yes
    username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
    log level = 1
    syslog = 0
    log file = /var/log/samba/%m
    max log size = 50
    smb ports = 139
    name resolve order = wins bcast hosts
    printcap name = CUPS
    show add printer wizard = No
    logon script = scripts\logon.bat
    logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U
    logon drive = X:
    domain logons = Yes
    domain master = No
    wins server = 172.16.0.1